Samsung | SL-C1454N | Samsung 컬러 레이저복합기 14ppm SL-C1454N 사용자 매뉴얼

User’s Guide
BASIC
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and
troubleshooting on Windows.
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and
troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
BASIC
1. Introduction
Key benefits
5
Features by model
7
Useful to know
15
About this user’s guide
16
Safety information
17
Machine overview
22
Control panel overview
26
Turning on the machine
31
Installing the driver locally
32
Reinstalling the driver
34
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
Menu overview
36
Machine’s basic settings
47
Media and tray
49
Basic printing
65
Basic copying
72
Basic scanning
77
Basic faxing
78
Using USB memory device
82
3. Maintenance
Ordering supplies and accessories
89
Available consumables
90
Available accessories
92
Available maintenance parts
93
Storing the toner cartridge
94
Redistributing toner
96
Replacing the toner cartridge
98
Replacing the waste toner container
101
Installing accessories
103
Monitoring the supplies life
107
Setting the toner low alert
108
Cleaning the machine
109
Tips for moving & storing your machine
115
2
BASIC
4. Troubleshooting
Tips for avoiding paper jams
117
Clearing original document jams
118
Clearing paper jams
123
Understanding the status LED
135
Understanding display messages
137
5. Appendix
Specifications
144
Regulatory information
157
Copyright
170
3
1. Introduction
This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine.
• Key benefits
5
• Features by model
7
• Useful to know
15
• About this user’s guide
16
• Safety information
17
• Machine overview
22
• Control panel overview
26
• Turning on the machine
31
• Installing the driver locally
32
• Reinstalling the driver
34
Key benefits
Environmentally friendly
• Fast, on-demand printing.
- C145x series
▪
For single-side printing, up to 14 ppm (A4) or up to 15 ppm (Letter).
- CLX-419x series /C186x series
▪
For single-side printing, up to 18 ppm (A4) or up to 19 ppm (Letter).
- CLX-626x series
• To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature (see "Eco
printing" on page 69).
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper
(see "Using advanced print features" on page 298).
▪
For single-side printing, up to 24 ppm (A4) or up to 25 ppm (Letter).
▪
For duplex printing, up to 12 ppm (A4) or up to 12 ppm (Letter).
Convenience
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided
printing) (see "Using advanced print features" on page 298).
• To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
• We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy.
Fast high resolution printing
• Simply touch your mobile device on the NFC tag on your printer and get the
print job done (see "Using the NFC feature" on page 238).
• You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google
Cloud Print™ enabled apps (see "Google Cloud Print™" on page 247).
• Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture
Manager" on page 336).
• You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
• You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600
x 600 x 4 bit).
• Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that
monitors and informs you of the machine’s status and allows you to
customize the machine’s settings (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
page 348 or "Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager" on page 345).
Key benefits
• Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan,
compile, and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax (see
"Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 344).
Supports various wireless network setting method
• AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the
ordinary program (see "Samsung AnyWeb Print" on page 338).
• Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available
only for Windows.
• Using the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) button
• If you have Internet access, you can get help, support application, machine
drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads.
• Using the USB cable or a network cable
Wide range of functionality and application support
• Using the Wi-Fi Direct
- You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on
the machine and the access point (a wireless router).
- You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB
cable or a network cable.
- You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi-Fi or
Wi-Fi Direct feature.
See "Introducing wireless set up methods" on page 196.
• Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
• Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as
“Confidential” (see "Using advanced print features" on page 298).
• You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on
page 153).
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.
Features by model
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.
Operating System
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Windows
●
●
●
●
Mac
●
●
●
●
Linux
●
●
●
●
Unix
●
●
●
●
Operating System
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Features by model
Software
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window.
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
SPL printer driver
●
●
●
●
PCL printer driver
●
●
●
●
PS printer driver
●
●
●
●
Software
(C145xFW/
C186xFWa)
XPS printer drivera
●
●
●
●
Direct Printing Utilitya
●
●
●
●
Scan to PC settings
●
●
●
●
Fax to PC settings
●
●
●
●
Samsung Easy
Printer Manager
(CLX-419xFN only)
(CLX-626xFD/CLX626xFR only)
●
●
●
●
Samsung Printer Status
●
●
●
●
Samsung AnyWeb Printa
●
●
●
●
Device Settings
Features by model
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Samsung Easy Document Creator
●
●
●
●
Easy Capture Manager
●
●
●
●
Samsung Easy Color Managera
●
●
●
●
SyncThru™ Web Service
●
●
●
●
SyncThru Admin Web Service
●
●
●
●
Easy Eco Driver
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Software
Fax
Samsung Network PC Fax
(CLX-419xFN only)
Scan
(CLX-626xFD/CLX626xFR only)
Twain scan driver
●
●
●
●
WIA scan driver
●
●
●
●
a. Download the software from the Samsung website and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads). Before installing, check whether your
computer’s OS support the software.
(●: Included, Blank: Not available)
Features by model
Variety feature
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Hi-Speed USB 2.0
●
●
●
●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100/
1000 Base TX wired LAN
●
●
●
●
Features
●
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n
●
wireless LANa
●
NFC (Near Field Communication)
(C145xFW/C186xFW
only)
Google Cloud Print™
●
●
AirPrint
●
●
Eco printing
●
●
Duplex (2-sided) printing
●
●
●
●
●
●
Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual)bc
●
●
USB memory interface
●
●
●
●
Memory module
○
○
○
○
○
○
Optional tray (Tray2)
Mass Storage Device
●d
Features by model
Features
Document
Feeder
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder
(DADF)
Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)
Handset
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
●
●
(CLX-626xFR only)
●
●
●
(CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD only)
Features by model
Fax
Features
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
Multi-send
●
●
●
●
(CLX-419xFN only)
Delay send
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
●
(CLX-419xFN only)
●
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
Priority send
●
Duplex send
●
(CLX-626xFR only)
Secure receive
●
●
(CLX-419xFN only)
●
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
●
Duplex print
●
(CLX-626xFR only)
Send/ Receive forward fax
Send/ Receive forward email
Send/ Receive forward server
●
(CLX-419xFN only)
●
●
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
●
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
●
(CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR only)
●
Features by model
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
●
●
●
●
Scanning to SMB server
●
●
Scanning to FTP server
●
●
Duplex scan
●
●
Features
Scan
Scanning to email
(CLX-626xFR only)
Scan to PC
●
●
●
●
Features by model
CLX-419xN
CLX-419xFN
C145xN
CLX-419xFW
C145xFW
C186xFW
CLX-626xND
CLX-626xFD
CLX-626xFR
CLX-626xFW
ID card copying
●
●
●
●
Reduced or enlarged
copying
●
●
●
●
Collation
●
●
●
●
Auto Fit
●
●
●
●
Book
●
●
●
●
2-up/4-up
●
●
●
●
Adjust background
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Features
Copy
Poster
Clone
Margin shift
Edge erase
Gray enhance
Duplex copy
a. Depending on your country, wireless LAN card may not be available. For some countries, only 802.11 b/g can be applied. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
bought your machine.
b. Available for Windows OS only.
c. Only tray1 is supported.
d. The machine is equipped with 4GB of SD (secure digital) card.
(●: Included, ○: Optional, Blank: Not available)
Useful to know
The machine does not print.
A paper jam has occurred.
• Open the print queue list and remove the document from the
list (see "Canceling a print job" on page 66).
• Open and close the door (see "Front view" on page 23).
• Remove the driver and install it again (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 32).
• Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows
(see "Setting your machine as a default machine" on page 297).
• Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper
jams" on page 123).
Printouts are blurry.
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?
• The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner
cartridge (see "Redistributing toner" on page 96).
• Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.
• Try a different print resolution setting (see "Opening printing
preferences" on page 67).
• Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region
to view product service information.
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.
• Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 98).
Where can I download the machine’s driver?
• Turn the product off and on again.
• Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and
troubleshoot accordingly (see "Understanding the status LED"
on page 135).
• You can get help, support application, machine drivers,
manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
Downloads.
About this user’s guide
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.
•
Do not discard this manual, and keep it for future reference.
•
Read the safety information before using the machine.
•
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting
chapter.
•
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.
•
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or model you purchased.
•
The screenshots in this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.
•
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.
2
General icons
Icon
Text
Description
Caution
Gives users information to protect the machine from
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.
Warning
Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury.
Note
Provides additional information or detailed
specification of the machine function and feature.
1
Conventions
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
•
Document is synonymous with original.
•
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
•
Machine refers to printer or MFP.
1. Introduction
16
Safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
4
Operating environment
Warning
3
Important safety symbols
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is
not grounded.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter
Warning
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe
personal injury or death.
Caution
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor
personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).
This could result in electric shock or fire.
• If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off
the power switch and unplug the machine.
• The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy
object could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the
plug with wet hands.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
1. Introduction
17
Safety information
5
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.
Operating method
Caution
This could result in electric shock or fire.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
Burns could occur.
It can cause damage to the machine.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and
request assistance from qualified service personnel.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper
tray.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
You may get injured.
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
Be careful when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could
result in electric shock.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.
Burns can occur.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal
objects.
It can damage the machine.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.
It can damage the machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.
1. Introduction
18
Safety information
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
Caution
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can
cause damage or fire.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the
electrical outlet.
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all
cords. The information below are only suggestions based on the
units weight.
If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting, do
not lift the machine. Ask for help, and always use the appropriate
amount of people to lift the device safely.
Then lift the machine:
•
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.
•
If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift
with 2 people.
•
If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or
more people.
6
Installation / Moving
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water
leaks.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place
the machine. Also consider the space required to open the cover
and trays.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
The place should be well-ventilated and be far from direct light,
heat, and humidity.
Place the machine in the environment where it meets the
operating temperature and humidity specification. Otherwise,
quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine (see
"General specifications" on page 144).
When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a
large number of pages in a non-ventilated space, it could pollute
the air and be harmful to your health. Place the machine in a wellventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically.
1. Introduction
19
Safety information
7
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Maintenance / Checking
Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or
larger.
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result
in electric shock or fire.
Caution
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the
machine.
This could result in electric shock or fire.
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.
You could get injured.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Children could get hurt.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock
or fire.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the
machine needs repairing.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide
provided with the machine.
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,
contact the electrical utility company.
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
1. Introduction
20
Safety information
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away
from children.
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
• Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the
machine.
• Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in
fire or electric shock.
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service
fee will be charged.
• The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
For supplies that contain toner dust (toner cartridge, waste toner
bottle, imaging unit, etc.) follow the instructions below.
• When disposing of the supplies, follow the instructions for
disposal. Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions.
8
Supply usage
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser
unit.
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.
• Do not wash the supplies.
• For a waste toner bottle, do not reuse it after emptying the
bottle.
If you do not follow the instructions above, it may cause machine
malfunction and environmental pollution. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by a user’s carelessness.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
1. Introduction
21
Machine overview
9
Components
Machine
Power cord
Software CDa
Misc. accessoriesb
Quick installation guide
a. The software CD contains the print drivers, user’s guide, and software applications.
b. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.
1. Introduction
22
Machine overview
10
Front view
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.
There are various types of machine.
1
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) cover
12
2
Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) width guide
13
3
Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) input tray
14
4
Automatic Document
Feeder(ADF) output tray
15
Paper width guides on a manual
feeder
5
Control panel
16
Manual feeder
17
Paper width guides on a multi-
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
CLX-419x series/ C145x series/C186x series/CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD
6
1
13
2
14
3
12
G
15
4
11 10
16
5
Control board cover
Front cover handle
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
purpose traya
7
Front cover
18
Multi-purpose support traya
8
Tray 1
19
Toner cartridge
9
USB memory port
20
Toner cartridge handle
10
Output tray
21
Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
22
NFC tagb (Near Field
Communication)
11
17
6
18
7
Document feeder output support
22
19
20
9
8
21
a. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD only.
b. C145xFW/C186xFW only.
1. Introduction
23
Machine overview
4
Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) output tray
16
16
5
Control panel
17
Scanner glass
17
6
18
Paper width guides on a multipurpose tray
CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW
1
2
15
3
Control board cover
Scanner lid
14 13
7
Front cover
19
Multi-purpose support tray
8
Tray 1
20
Toner cartridge
9
Optional traya
21
Toner cartridge handle
10
Push-release of Multi-purpose
tray
22
7
20
21
8
22
11
Multi-purpose tray
23
12
USB memory port
4
5
18
19
6
Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
Duplex jam cover
12
23
11 10
9
a. This is an optional feature. CLX-626x series only.
1
Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) cover
13
2
Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) width guide
14
3
Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF) input tray
15
Output tray
Document feeder output support
Front cover handle
1. Introduction
24
Machine overview
11
Rear view
• This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model. There are various types of machine.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
8
CLX-626x series
8
9
9
7
7
6
6
5
4
5
1
1
4
1
3
2
3
2
1
Waster toner container
4
Power receptacle
7
Network port
2
Rear cover
5
Power-switch
8
Telephone line socket (LINE)a
3
Rear cover handle
6
USB port
9
Extension telephone socket (EXT.)a
a. CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW only.
1. Introduction
25
Control panel overview
• This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. There are various types of control panels.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
• Some buttons may not work depending on the mode (copy, fax, or scan).
12
Type A(CLX-419xN/ C145xN/ CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR)
1
2
3
21
20
19
4
18
5
17
6
16
8
7
15
6
9
14
10
11
12
13
1
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading, when the original contains faint markings and dark images.
2
ID Copya
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID card copying" on page 75).
Scan tob
Sends scanned data.
1. Introduction
26
Control panel overview
3
4
Display screen
Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.
Switches to Copy mode.
Copya
5
Faxa
Switches to Fax mode.
6
Arrows
Scroll through the options available in the selected menu, and increase or decrease values.
7
OK
Confirms the selection on the screen.
8
Numeric keypad
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290).
9
Address Book
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers (see "Storing email address" on page 288 or "Setting
up the fax address book" on page 291).
10
11
12
Redial/Pausea
Stop/Clear
Power/Wake Up
13
Color
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode (see
"Redialing the fax number" on page 322).
Stops current operation.
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button
for more than three seconds.
Begins a printing job in color mode.
Start
Black
14
On Hook Diala
Begins a printing job in black and white mode.
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone (see
"Receiving manually in Tel mode" on page 328).
1. Introduction
27
Control panel overview
15
16
17
Back
Menu
Scana
18
19
20
21
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (see "Menu overview" on page 36).
Switches to Scan mode.
Toner colors
Show the status of each toner cartridge. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the Status LED turns red and the display
shows the message. However, the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new cartridge (see
"Toner-related messages" on page 138).
Status LED
Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 135).
Eco
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc-printing and copying only (see "Eco printing" on page
69).
Direct USB
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine.
a. CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
b. CLX-419xN/ C145xN/ CLX-626xND only.
1. Introduction
28
Control panel overview
13
Type B(CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFW)
1
Display screen
Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation.
2
Numeric keypad
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290).
3
Clear
Deletes characters in the edit area.
4
5
Stop
Power/Wake
Up
Stops an operations at any time.
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine from the power save mode. If you need to turn the machine off, press this button for
more than three seconds.
1. Introduction
29
Control panel overview
6
7
Start
Starts a job in black or color mode.
On Hook Dial
When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to making a call using speaker phone (see
"Receiving manually in Tel mode" on page 328).
8
Help
Gives detailed information about this machine’s menus or status.
9
Reset
Resets the current machine’s setup.
10 Wireless LED
Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 135).
11 Status LED
Indicates the status of your machine (see "Understanding the status LED" on page 135).
1. Introduction
30
Turning on the machine
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
1
2
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.
Turn the power switch on.
2
1
1. Introduction
31
Installing the driver locally
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see
"Installing driver over the network" on page 184).
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
• If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
"Installation for Mac" on page 175 or "Installation for Linux" on page 177
or "Installing the UNIX printer driver package" on page 190.
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
• The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the
machine and interface in use.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
• Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then,
click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
14
Windows
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install
window.
1. Introduction
32
Installing the driver locally
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
on.
2
3
Make sure that the machine is powered on.
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
1. Introduction
33
Reinstalling the driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall
the driver.
15
Windows
1
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Uninstall Samsung Printer Software.
2
3
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
• If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the
desktop screen mode.
• If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver
again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 32).
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
screen.
3
Follow the instructions in the window.
1. Introduction
34
Reinstalling the driver
1. Introduction
35
2. Menu Overview and
Basic Setup
This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options.
• Menu overview
36
• Machine’s basic settings
47
• Media and tray
49
• Basic printing
65
• Basic copying
72
• Basic scanning
77
• Basic faxing
78
• Using USB memory device
82
Menu overview
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions.
• An checked (√) appears next to the currently selected menu.
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
• The menus are described in the Advanced Guide (see "Useful Setting Menus" on page 250).
1
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ C145xN/ CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR
Accessing the menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used.
Select
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK.
Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK.
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to the ready mode.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
36
Menu overview
Fax Featurea
(see "Fax Feature" on page 259)
Darkness
Multi Send
Fax Setupa
(see "Sending setup" on page 261,
"Change Default setup" on page 263,
"Change Default setup" on page 263)
Sending
DRPD Modede
Copy Feature
(see "Copy feature" on page 253)
Original Size
Photo
Small
Magazine
Originalh
Light+5- Light+1
Delay Send
Redial Times
Ring to Answer
Reduce/Enlarge
Normal
Send Forward
Redial Term
Duplexf
Forward to Fax
Prefix Dial
Stamp RCV
Name
Forward to Emailc
ECM Mode
Text
Forward to
Text/Photo
Serverc
Dark+1- Dark+5
Original Type
Photo
Receive Forward
Normal
Book
Rcv Start Code
1->2Sided
2-Up
Centeri
Fax
Confirmation
Auto Reduction
1->2Sided Rotated
4-Up
Discard Size
2->1Sided
ID Copy
Border
Erase
Image TCR
DRPD Modede
2->2Sided
BookCopy
Duplex Printb
2->1Sided Rotated Adjust Background
Forward to Fax
Standard
Forward to PC
Toll Save
Fine
Forward to Emailc
Super Fine
Forward to
Receiving
Receive Mode
Original Size
Serverc
Fax
Duplexb
Forward & Print
Tel
1 Sided
Secure Receive
Hole Punch
1 Sided
Dial Moded
Resolution
Layout
Ans/Fax
Change Default
Resolution
Stampg
Item
Auto Color
Off
Opacityj
Darkness
Auto
Positionj
Darkness
Light+5- Light+1
Enhance Lev.1
WaterMarkg
Original Type
Normal
Enhance Lev.2
Message
Original Size
Dark+1- Dark+5
Erase Lev.1- Erase
Lev.4
Pagesk
Duplexb
Original Type
2 Sided
Off
Text
2 Sided Rotated
On
Text/Photo
Edge Eraseg
Off
Print
Cancel Job
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
37
Menu overview
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
CLX-626xFR only.
CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
This option may not be available depending on your country.
CLX-419xFN only.
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
This option does not appear when the 2-Up, 4-Up, Book copy, Duplex, Auto Fit option is on or the original document is loaded in ADF(DADF).
This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
This option appears only when the Item option is On.
This option does not appear when the Message option is Off.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
38
Menu overview
Copy Setup
(see "Copy Setup" on page 258)
Change Default
Original Size
Original
Type
Scan Feature
(see "Scan feature" on page 264)
USB Feature
Original Size
Darkness
FTP Featurec
Scan Setup
(see "Scan setup" on page
266)
Print Setup
(see "Print" on page 252)
Change Default
Orientation
USB Default
Portrait
Off
Landscape
Medium
Trapping
Copies
Text
Original Type
Original Size
Email Default
Copy Collation
Text/
Photo
Resolution
Original Type
FTP/SMB Defaultc
Color Mode
Resolution
Original Size
Color
Color Mode
Original Type
Normal
Normal
1 Sided
Gray
File Format
Resolution
Best
Enhanced
1->2Sided
Mono
Duplexb
Color Mode
Darkness
File Format
Minimum
Duplexb
Normal
Emulation Type
Maximum
Setup
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplexa
Photo
Magazine
1->2Sided Rotated
File Format
2->1Sided
Duplexb
2->2Sided
Darkness
2->1Sided Rotated
Email Feature
Auto Color
Original Size
Darkness
Original Type
Light+5- Light+1
Resolution
Normal
Color Mode
Dark+1- Dark+5
File Format
SMB Featurec
Original Size
Darkness
Original Type
Server Confirmation
Resolution
Color Mode
File Format
Duplexb
Copies
Resolution
Clear Text
Maximum
Screen
Detailed
Emulation
Off
Edge Enhance
Off
Normal
Maximum
Darkness
Duplexb
a. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only. Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
b. CLX-626xFR only.
c. CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
39
Menu overview
System Setup
(see "System setup" on page 269)
Machine Setup
Auto CR
Auto Power Off
Sounda
Machine IDa
Auto Tray Switchb
Off
Key Sound
Fax Numbera
Paper Substitution
On
Alarm Sound
Date & Time
Tray Protectionb
Clock Mode
Skip Blank Pages
Language
PDF Type
Default Modea
Stampb
Power Save
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Fax Sound
Report
Usage Counter
Account
Active Job
Maintenance
CLR Empty Msg.e
Configuration
Tray 2c
Supplies Info.
Custom Color
Import Setting
MP Trayb
Demo Page
Auto Color Reg.
Wakeup Event
Export Setting
Manual Feederd
Address Book
Tone Adjustment
System Timeout
Eco Settings
Change Default
Job Timeout
Vapor Mode
Fax Send
Default
Confirmationa
Auto Tone Adj.
Off
Paper Source
Fax Senta
Standard tone
On
Margin
E-mail Sent
Cal. ID Sensor
Humidity
Auto
Tray Confirm
Fax Receiveda
TonerLow Alert
Fax Scheduled
Serial Number
0 Sec
Jobsa
Ram Diskc
30 Sec
Network
Configuration
Paper Stacking
Off
Stored Job
Image Mgr.
Altitude
Adjustment
Auto Continue
Secured Job
Supplies Life
Tray 1
Paper Type
Job Manage.bf
PCL Font List
PS Font List
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
40
Menu overview
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
CLX-419xFN/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
This is an optional feature.CLX-626xND/ CLX-626xFD/ CLX-626xFR only.
CLX-419xN/ CLX-419xFN/ C145xN only.
This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
This option is available when the optional mass storage device, optional memory or Ram disk is installed.
Network
(see "Network setup" on page 280)
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Network Configuration
DHCP
Net. Activate
BOOTP
Http Activate
Static
WINS
TCP/IP (IPv6)
SNMP V1/V2
IPv6 Activate
SNTP
DHCPv6 Config
UPnP(SSDP)
Ethernet Speed
MDNS
Automatic
SetIP
10Mbps Half
SLP
10Mbps Full
100Mbps Half
100Mbps Full
1Gbps Full
802.1x
Clear Settings
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
41
Menu overview
2
CLX-419xFW/CLX-626xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW
You can set menus easily using the touch screen.
•
(Scan): When you press Scan from the display screen, the Scan screen
appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning options.
•
(Fax): When you press Fax from the display screen, the Fax screen
appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing options.
• The Main screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel.
• Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models.
• Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
•
(Setup): You can browse current machine settings or change machine
values.
•
(Job Status): Job status shows the jobs currently running, completed
job or in queue.
Introducing the Home Screen
•
•
•
(Eco): You can view the eco settings.
(Direct USB): Enters the USB menu when USB memory is inserted into
the USB memory port on your machine.
(Document Box): You can store the printing data, print the secure page
or shared folder.
•
•
: Shows the toner status.
•
: Selects the LCD brightness and language.
•
: Scroll through available options.
(Copy): When you press Copy from the display screen, the Copy
screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
42
Menu overview
Copy
(see "Copy" on page 253)
Basic Copy
Border Erase
Color Mode
Memory Send
Delayed Send
Group Dial Send
Darkness
Tray1
Stampa
Original Size
Darkness
Darkness
Darkness
Original Type
Tray2b
Item
Original Type
Resolution
Resolution
Resolution
MP Traya
Opacity
Duplexa
Duplexa
Duplexa
Manual Feederc
Position
Duplexa
Original Type
Original Type
Original Type
Darkness
Original Size
Original Size
Original Size
Color Mode
Color Mode
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Magazine
Color Mode
Auto
Color
Mono
Custom Copy
Duplexa
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Color Mode
Original Size
Original Type
Tray
a.
b.
c.
d.
Auto
Fax
(see "Fax" on page 259)
Watermarka
Layout
Off
ID Copy
Collation
Darkness
2-up
Color Mode
4-up
Color
ID Copy
Mono
Book Copy
Auto Fit Copy
N-up Copy
Original Size
On Hook Dial
SpeedDial Send
Darkness
Color Mode
Redial
Original Type
Darkness
Resolution
Darkness
N-up
Resolution
Duplexa
Resolution
Duplexa
Original Type
Duplexa
Book Copy
Adjust Background
Darkness
Darkness
Original Type
Original Size
Original Type
Edge Erasea
Original Type
Color Mode
Original Size
Color Mode
Original Size
Color Mode
Original Size
Color Mode
Off
SmallOriginal
Collate Copy
Hole Punch
Duplexa
Book Centerd
Darkness
Color Mode
Original Type
Book Copy
CLX-626xFW only.
This is an optional feature. CLX-626xFW only.
CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFWonly.
This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
43
Menu overview
Scan
(see "Scan" on page 264)
Local PC
Send Email
Eco
(see "Eco" on page 284)
Duplex
Original Type
Shared Foldera
Eco-On
Destination
To
Darkness
Original Size
Original Size
On
Resolution
Original Type
File Name
Resolution
Resolution
Off
Color Mode
Original Size
Color Mode
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Destination
File Format
File Name
PDF Encryptionab
Color Mode
Original Type
PDF Encryptionab
File Format
On
Duplexa
File Format
Original Size
Duplexa
PDF Encryptionb
Off
Original Size
PDF Encryptionab
Resolution
Darkness
Duplex
On-Forcedc
Original Type
Duplexa
Color Mode
File Name
Darkness
Darkness
Darkness
File Format
File Name
PDF Encryptionb
Original Type
Duplex
Original Size
Network PC
Destination
SMBa
FTPa
USB
Resolution
Destination
Darkness
Resolution
Color Mode
Original Type
File Name
Color Mode
File Format
Original Size
PDF Encryptionab
Resolution
To
File Format
Duplexa
Color Mode
Subject
PDF Encryptionab
Original Size
File Format
From
Duplexa
Original Type
PDF Encryptionb
CC
Darkness
Custom Email
BCC
Default Mode
Feature Configuration
File Policy
WSD
Settings
Default
Custom
File Name
Darkness
File Policy
a. CLX-626xFW only.
b. This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type.
c. If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings
> Eco), the On force message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
44
Menu overview
Direct USB
(see "Direct USB"
on page 285)
Print From
Setup
(see "System setup" on page 269)
Machine Setup
Email
Account
Fax Setup
Auto Fit
Default Setting
Print
Copies
Copy Default
Reset
Duplexa
Scan Default
Reports
Select Tray
Fax Default
Color Mode
Paper Setup
WINS
SNMP V1/V2
Connect via
PIN
Send Forward
SNTP
WLAN Settings
Receive Forward
UPnP(SSDP)
WLAN Defaults
Configuration
Toll Save
MDNS
WLAN Signal
Supplies Information
Secure Receive
SetIP
Tray1
Demo Page
Prefix Dial
SLP
Original Type
Tray2c
Help List
Stmp Rcvd Name
Wireless
Original Size
MP Traya
Address Book
ECM Mode
Wi-Fi ON/OFF
Copies
Resolution
Fax Send Confirmation
Modem Speed
Wi-Fi Direct
Resolution
Manual Feederd
Fax Sent
Image TCR
Email Sent
Setup Wizard
Scan to USB
Color Mode
File Name
File Format
PDF
Encryptionb
Duplexa
Darkness
File Policy
File Manage
Margin
Tray Behaviour
Auto Tray Switch
a
Auto Continue
Paper Substitution
Tray Protectiona
Address Book
PhoneBook
Fax Received
Network Setup
Clear Settings
Print Setup
Orientation
Wi-Fi Direct On/
Off
Clear Text
Device Name
Trapping
Edge Enhance
Fax Schedule Jobs
Ethernet Speed
IP Address
Screen
Network Configuration
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Group Owner
Emulation
PCL Font List
TCP/IP (IPv6)
Network Key
Select Tray
PS Font List
802.1x
Status
Usage Counter
Ethernet Activate
Http Activate
WPS Settings
Connect via PBC
Show Space
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
45
Menu overview
a.
b.
c.
d.
CLX-626xFW only.
This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type.
This is an optional feature.CLX-626xFW only.
CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW only.
Setup
(see "System setup" on page 269)
Initial Setup
Toner Status Alert
Document Boxb
(see "System setup" on page
269)
Admin Setup
System Boxes
Machine ID
Skip Blank Pages
Select Country
Job Timeout
Language
Altitude Adjustment
Date&Time
Auto CR
Item
Duplex
Clock Mode
Firmware Version
Opacity
Select Tray
Default Mode
PDF Type
Position
Copies
Sound/Volume
ImageOverwrite
Change Admin. Password
Power Save
Default Paper Size
Firmware Upgrade
Wakeup Event
CLR Empty Msga
Troubleshooting
System Timeout
Image Management
Language
Import Setting
Vapor Mode
Export Setting
Paper Stacking
User Access Control
Authentication
Stampb
Stored Print
Secured Print
Shared Folder
Color Mode
Humidity
a. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
b. CLX-626xFW only.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
46
Machine’s basic settings
•
You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in
Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
Date & Time: When you set the time and date, they are used in delay
fax and delay print. They are printed on reports. If, however, they are
not correct, you need to change it for the correct time being.
• For Windows and Mac users, see "Device Settings" on page 347.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager >
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,
see "Device Settings" on page 347.
Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad (see
"Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290).
• Month = 01 to 12
• Day = 01 to 31
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings.
• Year = requires four digits
To change the machine’s default settings, follow these steps:
• Minute = 00 to 59
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some
models.
1
2
Select
panel.
• Hour = 01 to 12
•
Clock Mode: You can set your machine to display the current time
using either a 12-hour or 24-hour format.
•
Power Save: When you are not using the machine for a while, use
this feature to save power.
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control
When you press the
(Power/Wake Up) button, start printing, or a fax is
Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Initial Setup on the touch
screen.
received, the product will wake up from the power saving mode.
Select the option you want, then press OK.
•
•
Language: change the language that is displayed on the control
panel.
Altitude Adjustment: Print quality is affected by atmospheric
pressure, which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of
the machine above sea level. Before you set the altitude value,
determine the altitude where you are (see "Altitude adjustment" on
page 287).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
47
Machine’s basic settings
3
4
5
Select the option you want, then press OK.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine.
• See "Entering various characters" on page 290.
• See "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290.
• See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59.
• See "Setting up the fax address book" on page 291.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
48
Media and tray
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your
machine.
• Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreements.
• Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
3
Tray overview
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x
series
CLX-626x series
• Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
• Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page
147).
2
2
1
1
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.
3
4
3
1 Tray extend lever
2 Paper length guide
3 Paper width guide
4 Paper width guides on a manual feeder
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
49
Media and tray
4
For Legal-sized paper
Loading paper in the tray
Push button as shown and pull out the tray.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
1
Tray 1 / optional tray
2
1
Pull out the paper tray.
LGL
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Tray overview" on
page 49).
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,
or jamming of the paper.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
50
Media and tray
2
Squeeze and the paper width guide and paper length lever to locate
them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray to
adjust to the size (see "Tray overview" on page 49).
4
After inserting paper into the tray, squeeze the paper width guides and
paper length guide.
2
2
1
CLX-419x series
1
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
3
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading papers.
C186x series
1 Paper length guide
2 Paper width guide
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
51
Media and tray
• Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp.
5
Insert the tray back into the machine.
6
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for tray (see
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 59).
• If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.
• Do not use a paper with a leading-edge curl, it may cause a paper jam or
the paper can be wrinkled.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
52
Media and tray
Multi-purpose (or Manual feeder) tray
1
Pull out the paper tray for manual feeding.
OR
The multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray can hold special sizes and types of
print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media
specifications" on page 147).
Press the push-release of multi-purpose tray and it down to open.
Tips on using the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray
•
Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the multipurpose (or manual feeder) tray.
•
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still
paper in the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray. This also applies to other
types of print media.
•
Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print
quality problems (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
•
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them
into the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
53
Media and tray
2
Load the paper.
3
Squeeze the multi-purpose (or manual feeder) tray paper width guides
and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much,
or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew.
1
2
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
• When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline
(See "Printing on special media" on page 55).
• When papers overlap when printing using Multi-purpose tray, open tray
1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again.
4
When you print a document, set the paper type and size for the multipurpose (or manual feeder) tray.
For information about setting the paper type and size on the control
panel (see "Setting the paper size and type" on page 59).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
54
Media and tray
5
Tray 1
Optional traya
Manual feeder/ Multipurpose tray
Thick
●
●
●
Thicker
●
Thin
●
●
●
Bond
●
●
●
Color
●
CardStock
●
Labels
●
●
Transparency
●
●
Envelope
●
●
Preprinted
●
●
Cotton
●
●
Recycled
●
●
●
Archive
●
●
●
Letterhead
●
●
●
Punched
●
●
●
Glossy Photo
●
●
●
Types
Printing on special media
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
Manager select
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from
the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type(see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
• When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time
(see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see
"Front view" on page 23).
To see paper weights for each sheet, refer to "Print media specifications" on
page 147.
Types
Plain
Tray 1
Optional tray
Manual feeder/ Multipurpose tray
●
●
●
a
●
●
●
●
a. CLX-626x series only.
(●: Supported, Blank: Not supported)
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
55
Media and tray
Envelope
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, selfadhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.
•
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.
•
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the
corner of the envelope.
1
2
CLX-419x series
•
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second about 170°C (338 °F). The extra flaps and strips
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
•
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the
edges of the envelope.
•
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
•
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:
-
Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise; jams may occur.
-
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not
contain air.
-
Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
-
Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine
during operation.
•
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.
•
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
56
Media and tray
Transparency
In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be
lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead
projector.
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in
laser printers.
CLX-419x series
•
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
•
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.
•
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.
•
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed
sheets stack up as they are being printed out.
•
Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox, such
as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter).
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
•
Must withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.
•
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
•
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt
may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
•
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
57
Media and tray
Labels
•
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine
components.
•
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.
•
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser
printers.
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
•
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature
about 170°C (338°F).
-
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
-
Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
•
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
58
Media and tray
Preprinted paper
Glossy Photo
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.
•
Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4/Letter) for this machine by HP
Professional Laser Paper 150.
6
Setting the paper size and type
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the
control panel buttons.
A
A
A
A
A
The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a
paper mismatch error.
To change the paper setting set in the machine, from the Samsung Easy Printer
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
Manager select
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings.
C186x series
•
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).
•
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely
affect machine rollers.
•
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing
print quality.
Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen, you can set it from
the control panel.
Then, set the paper type from the Printing preferences window > Paper tab >
Paper Type (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
59
Media and tray
7
• You can set the paper size and type from Device Settings in Samsung
Easy Printer Manager program.
Using the output support
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager >
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings,
see "Device Settings" on page 347.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or
Paper Type on the control panel.
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number
of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.
The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help
the printed pages to align. Unfold the output support.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Paper Setup > select a tray >
Paper Size or Paper Type on the touch screen.
2
3
4
Select the tray and the option you want.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the Paper
tab > Size > Edit... and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the Printing
Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
60
Media and tray
8
9
Preparing originals
•
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
•
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper
jam, low print quality and machine damage.
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
-
Coated paper
-
Onion skin or thin paper
-
Wrinkled or creased paper
-
Curled or rolled paper
-
Torn paper
•
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
•
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry
before loading.
•
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
•
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other
unusual characteristics.
Loading originals
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for
copying, scanning, and sending a fax.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending
on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on
page 23).
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
61
Media and tray
1
Lift and open the scanner lid.
2
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3
Close the scanner lid.
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and
toner consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always
keep it clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner
lid open.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
62
Media and tray
• Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
• Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall
on your hands and get hurt.
2
Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on
the document input tray.
• Do not look into the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
In the document feeder
Using the document feeder (or duplex automatic document feeder (DADF)), you
can load up to 50 sheets of paper (80 g/m2, 21 lbs bond) for one job.
1
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
63
Media and tray
3
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout.
Always keep the glass clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
64
Basic printing
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using
advanced print features" on page 298).
3
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
4
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range
are selected within the Print window.
10
Printing
If you are a Mac, Linux or UNIX operating systems user, refer to the
Advanced Guide (see "Mac printing" on page 307, "Linux printing" on page
309 or "Unix printing" on page 311).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
1
2
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the File menu.
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67).
5
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
65
Basic printing
11
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
•
) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
(Cancel or Stop/Clear)
button on the control panel.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
66
Basic printing
12
Opening printing preferences
The screenshot may differ depending on model.
• The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine in use.
• When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a
warning mark
or . An
mark means you can select that certain
option but it is not recommended, and an
mark means you cannot
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
Select your machine from the Select Printer.
Click Properties or Preferences.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
67
Basic printing
4
5
• You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing (see
"Easy Eco Driver" on page 339).
• You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status
button (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 348).
Enter name and description, and then select the desired icon.
Click OK. When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are saved.
To use a saved setting, select it in the Favorites tab. The machine is now set
to print according to the settings you have selected.
To delete saved settings, select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete.
Using a favorite setting
The Favorites option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Favorites and Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for
future use.
To save a Favorites item, follow these steps:
1
2
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
3
Click Save.
13
Using help
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and
press F1 on your keyboard.
Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
68
Basic printing
14
Eco printing
1
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on
the control panel.
Or press Eco on the control panel.
The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco function
allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is enabled. The
default setting of Eco mode is duplex (CLX-626x series only), Multiple Pages per
Side (2-up), Skip Blank Pages.
Or select Eco > Settings > Next on the touch screen.
2
Select the option you want and press OK.
•
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy
Printer Manager program.
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode.
-
Off: Set the eco mode off.
-
On: Set the eco mode on.
If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web
Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or
Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the On force
message appears. You have to enter the password to change the eco mode
status.
• For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer
Manager >
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see
"Device Settings" on page 347.
•
Setting Eco mode on the control panel
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru™ Web Service
or Samsung Easy Printer Manager. Before you select this item, you
must set the eco function in SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager (Device Settings > Eco).
-
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
3
Select Template
▪
Default Eco: The machine is set to Default Eco mode.
▪
Custom Eco: Change any necessary values.
Press OK to save the selection.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
69
Basic printing
Setting eco mode on the driver
Result simulator
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or
Preferences from the Print window (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67).
Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (
means the eco mode is currently enabled.
), that
Eco options
•
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel.
•
None: Disables Eco mode.
•
Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to
use.
•
Password: If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode, you have to
enter the password to change the status.
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you
selected.
•
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled.
•
Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA,
the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and
www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index.
•
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing
power consumption of this machine.
•
The actual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may
differ depending on the operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connection method, media type [thickness], media
size, job complexity, etc.
Password button: You can set from SyncThru™ Web Service (Settings tab >
Machine Settings > System > Eco Settings) or Samsung Easy Printer
Manager (Device Settings > Eco), the password button is activated. To
change the print settings, click on this button, enter the password or need
to contact the administrator.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
70
Basic printing
15
Secure printing
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• You might not be able to print a complex document using the RAM Disk.
Install an optional memory to print a complex document.
When you use a printing device in an office, school or other public place, you can
protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the
secure printing feature.
This features may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Printing secure documents from the control panel
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Menu overview" on
page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
1
Starting secure printing from the SyncThru™ Web
Service
1
2
Click Login on the upper right of SyncThru™ Web Service website (see
"Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
3
4
Settings > Machine Settings > System > RAM Disk.
(Menu) > Job Management > Secured Job on the control
OR
For the model with a touch screen, select
(Document Box) > System
Boxes > Next > Secured Print on the touch screen.
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
Select
panel.
2
3
4
Select the document to print.
Enter the password that you set from the printer driver.
Print or delete the document.
Enable RAM Disk.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
71
Basic copying
• For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Copy" on
page 253).
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press
(Stop
or Stop/Clear) button and the copying will stop.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
17
Changing the settings for each copy
16
Basic copy
1
Select
Or select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
2
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and
easily make a copy.
(settings) on the touch screen.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,
Darkness, Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons
(see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 72).
4
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if
necessary.
5
Press
• If you press the
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button twice while setting the
copy options, all of the options you have set for the current copy job will
be canceled and returned to their default status. Or, they will
automatically return to their default status after the machine completes
the copy in progress.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
(Start).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
72
Basic copying
Darkness
Original Type
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust
the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document for the current copy job.
1
Select
(copy) >
control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the
1
Or press Darkness on the control panel.
Or select
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
panel.
(settings) >Darkness on the touch
screen.
2
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the control
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
(settings) > Original Type on the
touch screen.
Select the option you want and press OK.
Press
mode.
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original Type on the
Or select Copy > Basic Copy >
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the
darkest.
3
Select
(copy) >
control panel.
2
) icon to return to ready
Select the option you want and press OK.
•
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
•
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts.
3
•
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
•
Magazine: Use when the originals are magazines.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
73
Basic copying
Reduced or enlarged copy
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% from the
document feeder or scanner glass.
1
Select
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >
Custom on the control panel.
Or select
the control panel.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 10).
Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
• If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not
available.
To select from the predefined copy sizes
1
Select
(copy) >
the control panel.
Or select
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge> Custom on
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge >
Custom on the touch screen.
2
3
4
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on the control
panel.
Or select Copy > Custom Copy >
(settings) > Reduce/Enlarge on
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
the touch screen.
2
3
Select the option you want and press OK.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
74
Basic copying
18
ID card copying
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
• The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
• If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available.
3
4
Press
(Start).
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side
and Press [Start].
Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
1
Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.
Press ID Copy on the control panel.
Or select
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Layout > ID Copy on the control
panel.
5
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
Or select Copy > ID Copy on the touch screen.
2
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
75
Basic copying
6
Press
(Start) button.
• If you do not press the
(Start) button, only the front side will be
copied.
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be
printed.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
76
Basic scanning
For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan
features" on page 313).
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
19
Basic Scanning
3
Select the scan destination you want and press OK.
Default setting is My Documents.
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals.
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.
• You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list. Also
you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different
path.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model.
• To change the Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Switch to
advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
• If you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page 314).
1
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
Select
(scan) > Scan To PC on the control panel.
4
5
Select the option you want and press OK.
Scanning begins.
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
Or select Scan > Local PC on the touch screen.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
77
Basic faxing
20
• This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/C145xN/CLX-626xND (see
"Variety feature" on page 10).
• For special faxing features, see "Fax features" on page 322.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
• You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more
information ask your internet service provider.
• We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public
Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use
a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter
eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or
Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the
machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Microfilter.
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem / Telephone line
(see "Rear view" on page 25).
Preparing to fax
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to
your telephone wall jack (see "Rear view" on page 25). Refer to the Quick
Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a
telephone connection is different from one country to another.
21
Sending a fax
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or
the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document feeder
and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the document
feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select
(fax) on the control panel.
Or select Fax > Memory Send >
3
(settings) on the touch screen.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 80).
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
78
Basic faxing
4
Enter the destination fax number (see "Keypad letters and numbers" on
page 290).
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 80).
5
Press
(Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and
send the fax to the destinations.
4
5
6
Press
• If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung
Network PC Fax (see "Sending a fax in the computer" on page 323).
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
button before the machine starts transmission.
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to
place another page.
(On Hook Dial) on the control panel or lift the handset.
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
Press
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax
signal from the remote fax machine.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple
locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote
station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory.
Sending a fax manually
Perform the following to send a fax using
You cannot send faxes with this feature if you have chosen super fine as an
option or if the fax is in color.
(On Hook Dial) on the control
panel.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select
2
Select
(fax) on the control panel.
Or select Fax > On Hook Dial >
(settings) on the touch screen.
(fax) on the control panel.
Or select Fax > SpeedDial Send or Group Dial Send >
(settings) on
the touch screen.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
79
Basic faxing
3
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 80).
4
Select
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel.
Or select Next on the touch screen.
5
the
(Address book) button.
Enter the second fax number and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
7
Receiving a fax
Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the
machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically
receives the fax.
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using
6
22
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 5 and 6.
• You can add up to 10 destinations.
23
Adjusting the document settings
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your original’s
status to get the best quality.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
• Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial number.
Resolution
8
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another
No.? prompt and press OK.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
Multi send report is printed after sending faxes.
The default document settings produce good results when using typical textbased originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality
fax.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
80
Basic faxing
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting (see Advanced Guide).
•
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.
•
Color Fax: Original with colors.
• Memory transmission is not available in this mode.
1
Select
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control
• You can only send a color fax if the machine you are communicating with
supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually.
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial,
Delayed Send, or etc. >
2
(settings) > Resolution on the touch screen.
Select the option you want and press OK.
•
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.
•
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
•
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.
• For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
• When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine
with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine
resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode
supported by the other fax machine.
3
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default
setting (see "Fax" on page 259).
1
Select
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control
Or select Fax > select a fax such as Memory Send, On Hook Dial,
Delayed Send, or etc. >
2
3
(settings) > Darkness on the touch screen.
Select a darkness level you want.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
81
Using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector.
A
24
B
About USB memory
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give
you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and
videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or
move.
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.
You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device.
•
Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device
•
Print data stored on a USB memory device
•
Restore backup files to the machine’s memory
•
Format the USB memory device
•
Check the available memory space
25
Plugging in a USB memory device
Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.
• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation
or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does
not cover damage caused by user’s misuse.
• If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings
and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it.
For details about these features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory
device.
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1.1 and
USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory devices with
FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
82
Using USB memory device
Scanning
26
Scanning to a USB memory device
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 or "Control panel overview" on page 26).
1
2
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
3
Select
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
(scan) > Scan To USB > OK on the control panel.
Or select Scan > USB > Next > Start on the touch screen.
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory
device.
The machine begins scanning.
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from the
machine.
Customizing Scan to USB
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB
job.
1
Select
(scan) >
control panel.
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the
Or select Scan to >
control panel.
(Menu) > Scan Feature > USB Feature on the
Or select Direct USB > Scan to USB >
(settings) on the touch screen.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
83
Using USB memory device
2
3
4
5
Select the setting option you want appears.
27
Printing from a USB memory device
•
Original Size: Sets the image size.
•
Original Type: Sets the original document’s.
•
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
•
Color Mode: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option,
you cannot select JPEG in File Format.
•
File Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in Color
Mode.
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.
File is supported by Direct Print option.
•
Duplex: Sets the duplex mode.
•
Darkness: Sets the brightness level to scan an original.
•
File Name: Sets the file name.
•
File Policy: Sets the policy to save files between overwirting or
renaming
•
PDF Encryption: Sets the encrypts PDF files.
Select the desired status you want and press OK.
•
PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be
different.
•
TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
•
JPEG: JPEG Baseline
•
PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version.
To print a document from a USB memory device
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
2
Select USB Print.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
You can change the default scan settings. Refer to the Advanced Guide.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
84
Using USB memory device
3
Select the folder or file you want and press OK.
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more
files or folders in the selected folder.
4
5
Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number.
7
Backing up data
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure
or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them
as backup files on a USB memory device.
Press OK, Start or Print to start printing the selected file.
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.
6
28
Backing up data
Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2.
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.
1
Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
Press
mode.
2
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Export Setting
on the control panel.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Export
Setting on the touch screen.
3
Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.
The data is backed up to the USB memory.
4
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
85
Using USB memory device
Restoring data
29
Managing USB memory
1
Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to
the USB memory port.
2
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Import Setting
on the control panel.
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at
once by reformatting the device.
If you see [+] or [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files
or folders in the selected folder.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Import
Setting on the touch screen.
3
4
5
6
Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot be
restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data before
deleting it.
Select the file you want to restore and press OK.
Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Deleting an image file
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a
file >
(settings) > Delete on the touch screen.
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
2
Select File Manage > Delete and press OK.
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
86
Using USB memory device
3
4
5
Select the file you want to delete and press OK.
Viewing the USB memory status
Select Yes.
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving
documents.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > Show Space > Next on the
touch screen.
Formatting a USB memory device
For touch screen model, select Direct USB > File Manage > Next > select a
file >
1
2
3
4
(settings) > Format on the touch screen.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
Select File Manage > Format and press OK.
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine,
and then press Direct USB.
2
3
4
Select Check Space.
The available memory space appears on the display.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Select Yes.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
2. Menu Overview and Basic Setup
87
3. Maintenance
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.
• Ordering supplies and accessories
89
• Available consumables
90
• Available accessories
92
• Available maintenance parts
93
• Storing the toner cartridge
94
• Redistributing toner
96
• Replacing the toner cartridge
98
• Replacing the waste toner container
101
• Installing accessories
103
• Monitoring the supplies life
107
• Setting the toner low alert
108
• Cleaning the machine
109
• Tips for moving & storing your machine
115
Ordering supplies and accessories
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.
3. Maintenance
89
Available consumables
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the followings of supplies for your machine:
Type
Toner
cartridge
Model
Average yielda
Part name
• CLX-419x series
• Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 2,500 standard pages (Black)
• CLT-K504S: Black
• C145x series
• Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 1,800 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
• CLT-Y504S: Yellow
• C186x series
• CLT-M504S: Magenta
• CLT-C504S: Cyan
• CLX-626x series
• Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 2,000 standard pages (Black)
• CLT-K506S: Black
• Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 1,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
• CLT-Y506S: Yellow
• CLT-M506S: Magenta
• CLT-C506S: Cyan
• Average continuous black cartridge yield: Approx. 6,000 standard pages (Black)
• CLT-K506L: Black
• Average continuous color cartridge yield: Approx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
• CLT-Y506L: Yellow
• CLT-M506L: Magenta
• CLT-C506L: Cyan
Waste toner
container
• CLX-419x series
• Approx. 14,000 standard pages (Black)
• C145x series
• Approx. 3,500 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cyan)
CLT-W504
• C186x series
• CLX-626x series
CLT-W506
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size.
3. Maintenance
90
Available consumables
Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used,
the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be
purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise,
new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your
machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other
supplies according to the specific country conditions.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot
guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair
required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not
be covered under the machine’s warranty.
3. Maintenance
91
Available accessories
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s performance and capacity.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Accessory
Memory module
Function
Extends your machine’s memory capacity.
Part name
• CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: ML-MEM370 (512 MB)
• CLX-626x series: ML-MEM380 (1,024 MB)
Optional tray
If you are experiencing frequent paper supply
• CLX-626x series: CLP-S680A
problems, you can attach an additional 520a sheet tray.
a. Plain paper 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond).
3. Maintenance
92
Available maintenance parts
You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems
resulting from the worn-out parts. Maintenance parts are mostly rollers, belts and pads. However, the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the
model. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. To purchase
maintenance parts, contact the retailer where you bought the machine. The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the Samsung Printer Status
program. Or if your machine supports display screen, a message is displayed in the display screen. The replacement period varies based on the operating system
used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, paper type, paper size, and job complexity.
3. Maintenance
93
Storing the toner cartridge
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature
and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to
ensure optimal performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new
Samsung toner cartridge.
Store the cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used.
This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions. The toner
cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation
– if original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge
with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
1
Handling instructions
•
Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
•
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
•
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can
cause internal damage and toner spillage.
2
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf
and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed
from the printer, follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge
properly.
•
Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.
•
Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it
were installed in the machine.
•
Do not store consumables in any of the following conditions:
-
Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
-
Humidity range less than 20% or greater than 80%.
-
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
-
Direct sunlight or room light.
-
Dusty places.
-
A car for a long period of time.
-
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
-
An environment with salty air.
Toner cartridge usage
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung
brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or
remanufactured toner cartridges.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused
by the use of refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner
cartridges.
3. Maintenance
94
Storing the toner cartridge
3
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, media type and/or
media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the
toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
3. Maintenance
95
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:
•
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density varies from side to side.
•
The Status LED blinks red. The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display.
•
The computer’s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner (see "Using Samsung Printer
Status" on page 348).
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3. Maintenance
96
Redistributing toner
3. Maintenance
97
Replacing the toner cartridge
For CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series:
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
For CLX-626x series:
Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge.
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).
•
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate when each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.
•
The computer’s Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is empty on toner (see "Using Samsung
Printer Status" on page 348).
Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 90).
• Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly, it will increase the initial print quality.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.
• If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3. Maintenance
98
Replacing the toner cartridge
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
3. Maintenance
99
Replacing the toner cartridge
CLX-626x series
3. Maintenance
100
Replacing the waste toner container
When the life span of the waste toner container has expired, waste toner container-related message appears on the screen display of the control panel, indicating
the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Check the waste toner container for your machine (see "Available consumables" on page 90).
• Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service representative when print quality problems
occur.
• When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands.
• Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill.
3. Maintenance
101
Replacing the waste toner container
Do not tilt or turn over the container.
1
2
1
2
2
1
3. Maintenance
102
Installing accessories
4
5
Precautions
•
Disconnect the power cord
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the power
cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories.
•
Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
Setting Device Options
When you install the optional devices such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Options.
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
When installing accessories, the battery inside the machine is a service
component. Do not change it by yourself. There is a risk of an explosion if
battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose used batteries according to
the instructions.
3
4
For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows 8, search for Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
Right-click your machine.
For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7, For Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2, from
context menus, select the Printer properties.
3. Maintenance
103
Installing accessories
If Printer properties item has ▶ mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with selected printer.
5
User permission: If you check this option, only users with user
permission can start a print job.
-
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with
group permission can start a print job.
Select Device Options.
If you want to encrypt job accounting password, check Job Accounting
Password Encryption.
The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating
system you are using.
•
6
-
Select the appropriate option.
7
Custom Paper Size Settings: You can specify custom paper size.
Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. if so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
Tray Options: Select the optional tray you installed. You can select
the tray.
•
Storage Options: Select the optional memory you installed. If this
feature is checked, you can select the Print Mode.
•
Printer Configuration: Select the printer language for the print job.
•
Administrator Settings: You can select the Printer Status and EMF
Spooling.
•
Admin Job Accounting: Allows you to associate user and account
identification information with each document you print.
3. Maintenance
104
Installing accessories
6
Upgrading a memory module
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM). Use this memory module slot to install additional memory. We recommend the use of only genuine
Samsung DIMM's. You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM's.
The order information is provided for optional accessories (see "Available accessories" on page 92).
After installing the optional memory, you can use the advanced printing features, such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer
properties window. You can control the active job queue and file policy in Job Manage. menu (see "Using optional device features" on page 332).
1
2
2
1
3. Maintenance
105
Installing accessories
2
2
1
1
3. Maintenance
106
Monitoring the supplies life
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if
necessary.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36).
• Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
1
Select
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Report > Supplies Information on the touch screen.
2
3
Select the option you want and press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready mode.
3. Maintenance
107
Setting the toner low alert
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not
this message or LED appears.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the menu" on page 36).
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
• You can set the machine’s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program.
- For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager >
page 347.
1
Select
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see "Device Settings" on
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > TonerLow Alert on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup > Toner Status Alert on the touch screen.
On the touch screen model, you can set the toner's Warning Level for the toner low error in the Toner Status Alert option. Warning Level means the remaining
amount of toner (%) in the toner cartridge.
2
3
Select the option you want.
Press OK to save the selection.
3. Maintenance
108
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing
condition and use your machine longer.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the
cabinet.
• If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.
7
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
3. Maintenance
109
Cleaning the machine
8
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks
or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.
• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary.
• Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
• Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such
as benzene or thinner. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine.
• Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.
• Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
3. Maintenance
110
Cleaning the machine
3. Maintenance
111
Cleaning the machine
9
Cleaning the pickup roller
• Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
3. Maintenance
112
Cleaning the machine
10
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.
• Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before
cleaning the machine.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
1
2
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
Lift and open the scanner lid.
3. Maintenance
113
Cleaning the machine
3
Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry.
4
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
4
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
Document feeder glass
White bar
Close the scanner lid.
3. Maintenance
114
Tips for moving & storing your machine
•
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to
the machine or reduce print quality.
•
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.
3. Maintenance
115
4. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
• Tips for avoiding paper jams
117
• Clearing original document jams
118
• Clearing paper jams
123
• Understanding the status LED
135
• Understanding display messages
137
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine
has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error.
If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting
chapter in the Advanced Guide (see "Troubleshooting" on page 357).
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct medias, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:
•
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 49).
•
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
•
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
•
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
•
Do not mix paper type and size in a tray.
•
Use only recommended print media (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
4. Troubleshooting
117
Clearing original document jams
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals.
4. Troubleshooting
118
Clearing original document jams
1
Original paper jam in front of scanner
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
• This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
4. Troubleshooting
119
Clearing original document jams
2
Original paper jam inside of scanner
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
• This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
4. Troubleshooting
120
Clearing original document jams
3
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
• This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 23).
1
2
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.
4. Troubleshooting
121
Clearing original document jams
4
Original paper jam in scanner duplex path
• CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW only.
• Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
• This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Front view" on page 23).
2
1
4. Troubleshooting
122
Clearing paper jams
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.
5
In tray1
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
4. Troubleshooting
123
Clearing paper jams
6
In optional tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
CLX-626x series only.
4. Troubleshooting
124
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting
125
Clearing paper jams
7
In the manual feeder/multi-purpose tray
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
4. Troubleshooting
126
Clearing paper jams
CLX-626x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
4. Troubleshooting
127
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
1
2
3
4. Troubleshooting
128
Clearing paper jams
8
Inside the machine
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. Check your machine type (see "Front view" on page 23).
4. Troubleshooting
129
Clearing paper jams
9
In the exit area
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
4. Troubleshooting
130
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting
131
Clearing paper jams
CLX-626x series
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.
4. Troubleshooting
132
Clearing paper jams
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to next step:
4. Troubleshooting
133
Clearing paper jams
10
In the duplex unit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
CLX-626x series only.
4. Troubleshooting
134
Understanding the status LED
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.
• Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 26).
• To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part (see "Understanding display messages" on page 137).
• You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer’s Samsung Printing Status window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on page 348).
• If the problem persists, call a service representative.
LED
Status
Off
Description
The machine is off-line.
Blinking
When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.
On
• The machine is on-line and can be used.
Green
• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When the problem
is cleared, the machine resumes.
Blinking
Status
• Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge lifea of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for
replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page
96).b
Red
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge lifea. It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
On
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on page 137).
• A paper jam has occurred (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 123).
4. Troubleshooting
135
Understanding the status LED
LED
Status
Wirelessb Blue
(
)
Power/
WakeUp
Blue
Eco
Green
Description
Blinking
The machine is connecting to a wireless network.
On
The machine is connected to a wireless network (see "Wireless network setup" on page 195).
Off
The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.
On
The machine is in power save mode.
Off
The machine is in ready mode or machine’s power is off.
On
Eco mode is on (see "Eco printing" on page 69).
Off
Eco mode is off.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is
on and the printer stops printing.
b. Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country (see "Control panel overview" on page 26).
4. Troubleshooting
136
Understanding display messages
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.
• You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computer’s
Printing Status program window (see "Using Samsung Printer Status" on
page 348).
• If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job
again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.
11
Paper Jam-related messages
Message
• Original paper jam
inside of scanner.
Remove jam
Meaning
Suggested solutions
The loaded original
document has
jammed in
document feeder.
Clear the jam (see "Clearing
original document jams" on
page 118).
• When you call for service, provide the service representative with the
contents of display message.
• Original paper jam
in front of scanner.
Remove jam
• Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the
options or models.
• Paper Jam
in Tray1
Paper has jammed
in the tray.
Clear the jam (see "In tray1" on
page 123).
• Paper Jam
in Tray2
Paper has jammed
in the optional tray.
Clear the jam (see "In optional
tray" on page 124).
• Paper Jam
in MP Tray
Paper has jammed
Clear the jam (see "In the
in the multi-purpose manual feeder/multi-purpose
tray.
tray" on page 126).
• Jam inside machine
Paper has jammed
inside the machine.
• [error number] indicates the error number.
• [tray type] indicates the tray number.
• [media type] indicates the media type.
• [media size] indicates the media size.
• [color] indicates the color of toner.
• [unit type] indicates the unit type.
Clear the jam (see "Inside the
machine" on page 129).
• Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed
inside the duplex
area.
Clear the jam (see "In the
duplex unit area" on page 134).
• Jam in exit area
Clear the jam (see "In the exit
area" on page 130).
Paper has jammed
in the paper exit
area.
4. Troubleshooting
137
Understanding display messages
12
Message
Toner-related messages
Message
Meaning
• Error [error
number]
Toner Failure:
[error number]
[color]
Install [color]
toner again
A toner cartridge is
not installed.
•
Protective film is
not removed from
toner.
Remove the protective film from the
toner cartridge. Refer to Quick
Installation Guide provided with your
machine.
The indicated toner
cartridge is not
suitable for your
machine.
Install the corresponding toner
cartridge with a Samsung-genuine
cartridge (see "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 98).
[color] toner
not installed
Install [color]
toner
cartridge
• [color]toner
Not
compatible
[color] toner
cartridge is
not
compatible.
Check guide
Suggested solutions
Reinstall the toner cartridge.
A toner cartridge is Reinstall the toner cartridge two or
not being detected three times to confirm it is seated
properly. If the problem persists,
contact the service representatives.
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Prepare new
[color] toner
Prepare new
[color] toner
cartridge
Small amount of
toner is left in the
indicated cartridge.
The estimated
cartridge life of
toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge for a
replacement. You may temporarily
increase the printing quality by
redistributing the toner (see
"Redistributing toner" on page 96).
• Replace new
[color] toner
Replace with
new [color]
toner
cartridge
The indicated toner • You can choose Stop or Continue
as shown on the control panel. If
cartridge has
you select Stop, the printer stops
almost reached its
printing. If you select Continue,
estimated
the
printer keeps printing but the
cartridge lifea.
printing quality cannot be
guaranteed.
• Replace the toner cartridge for the
best print quality when this
message appears. Using a
cartridge beyond this stage can
result in printing quality issues (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 98).
The indicated toner Replace the toner cartridge (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on
cartridge has
page 98).
reached its
estimated
cartridge lifea.
4. Troubleshooting
138
Understanding display messages
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates
the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798 (see "Available
consumables" on page 90). The number of pages may be affected by operating environment,
percentage of image area, printing interval, media, percentage of image area, and media size.
Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears
and the machine stops printing.
Message
• Paper jam or
empty in tray
Tray-related messages
Message
• Output bin full
• Output bin full. Remove
printed paper
Meaning
Suggested solutions
The output tray is full.
Remove papers from the
output tray, the printer
resumes printing.
Suggested solutions
• Paper has jammed
in the paper feed
area.
• Clear the jam (see
"CLX-419x series/
C145x series/C186x
series" on page 126).
• There is no paper in
tray.
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a
non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required
as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be
covered under the machine warranty.
13
Meaning
• Load paper in tray
(see "Multi-purpose
(or Manual feeder)
tray" on page 53).
• Paper Empty in tray 1
There is no paper in
• Paper is empty in tray 1. tray 1.
Load paper
Load paper in tray 1 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 50).
• Paper Empty in tray 2
Load paper in tray 2 (see
"Tray 1 / optional tray"
on page 50).
There is no paper in
• Paper is empty in tray 2. tray 2.
Load paper
• Paper Empty in MP
• Paper is empty in MP
tray.
Load paper
There is no paper in
Load paper in the multithe multi-purpose tray. purpose tray (see "Multipurpose (or Manual
feeder) tray" on page
53).
4. Troubleshooting
139
Understanding display messages
14
Message
Network-related messages
Message
• IP Conflict
• This IP address
conflicts with that of
other system
• 802.1x Network Error
Meaning
Check the IP address
and reset it if necessary
(see Advanced Guide).
Fail to authenticate.
Check the network
authentication
protocol. If the problem
persists, contact your
network administrator.
• 802.1x Network Error
Contact the Admin.
15
Misc. messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Adjusting Color
Registration...
The machine is adjusting
the color registration.
Wait a few minutes.
• Calibrating image
density…
The machine is
calibrating the image
density.
Wait a few minutes.
Suggested solutions
• Door is open.
Close it
The front cover or rear
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
• Scanner door open
The document feeder
cover is not securely
latched.
Close the cover until it
locks into place.
The machine unit cannot
be controlled.
Reboot the power and
try the printing job
again. If the problem
persists, please call for
service.
The machine is in a room
with improper room
temperature.
Move the machine to a
room with proper
room temperature (see
"Specifications" on
page 144).
Suggested solutions
The network IP address
you have set is being
used by someone else.
Meaning
• Door of scanner is
open.
Close the door
• Error: [error number]
Actuator [unit type]
Failure: [error number]
Call for service
• Error: [error number]
[unit type] Failure: [error
number] Turn off then
on. Call for service if the
problem persists.
• Error: [error number]
[unit type] Unit Failure:
[error number] Please
turn off then on
• Not Proper room temp
• Not Proper room
temperature.
Change room
temperature
4. Troubleshooting
140
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Prepare TR. belt
Prepare new image
transfer belt unit
The life of the transfer
belt has expired.
Replace the transfer
belt with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
• Replace Fuser uint
Replace with new fuser
uint
The life of the fuser unit
will be expired.
Replace the fuser unit
with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
• Install TR. belt unit
Install image transfer
belt unit
The transfer belt is not
installed.
• TR. belt Not compatible The transfer belt of the
Image transfer belt unit machine is not for your
is not compatible.
machine.
Check guide
• Waste toner Full
Waste toner container
is almost full.
Replace with new one
The life span of the waste
toner container has
expired and the printer
will stop printing until a
new waste toner
container is placed into
the printer.
Install a Samsunggenuine transfer belt.
Contact the service
representatives.
Install the a Samsunggenuine part designed
for your machine.
Contact the service
representatives.
Replace a waste toner
container with a
Samsung-genuine
waste toner container.
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Waste Not Installed
Waste toner tank is not
installed. install it
The waste toner
container is not installed.
Install the waste toner
container. If it is
already installed, try to
reinstall the waste
toner container. If the
problem persists, call
for service.
• Replace pickup roller
Replace with new [tray
type] pickup roller
The life of the tray1, tray2
or MP tray pick-up roller
will expired soon.
Replace the tray pickup roller with a new
one. Contact the
service
representatives.
• Replace retard roller
End of life, Replace with
new [tray type] retard
roller
The life of the tray1 or
tray2 retard roller has
expired.
Replace the tray retard
roller with a new one.
Contact the service
representatives.
• Memory Full
Fax memory is full.
Print or remove
received fax job
The memory is full. No
more fax data can be
received.
Print or remove the
received fax data in the
memory.
• Scanner Locked
Scanner locking switch
is locked. Pull Blue
Latch towards you.
The scanner is locked.
Reboot the power. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
4. Troubleshooting
141
Understanding display messages
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
• Error: [error number]
Fax System Failure:
[error number] Install
fax modem card again
There is a problem in the
fax system.
Install the fax card. If it
is already installed, try
to reinstall the fax card.
If the problem persists,
call for service.
• Error: [error number]
UI System Failure:
[error number] Call for
service
There is a problem in the
UI system.
Unplug the power
cord and plug it back
in. If the problem
persists, call for service.
• Error: [error number]
EngineSystem Failure:
[error number] Call for
service
There is a problem in the
engine system.
Unplug the power
cord and plug it back
in. If the problem
persists, call for service.
4. Troubleshooting
142
5. Appendix
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.
• Specifications
144
• Regulatory information
157
• Copyright
170
Specifications
1
General specifications
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.
Items
Dimensiona
Width x Length x Height
Description
• CLX-419x series /C145x series/C186x series: 448 x 417 x 423 mm (17.64 x 16.42 x 16.65 inches)
• CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: 420 x 452.5 x 476.8 mm (16.54 x 17.81 x 18.77 inches)
• CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: 469 x 452.5 x 504.3 mm (18.46 x 17.81 x 19.85 inches)
Weighta
Machine with consumables
• CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: 21.44 Kg (47.27 Ibs)
• CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: 24.8 Kg (54.68 Ibs)
• CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: 26.7 Kg (58.86 Ibs)
5. Appendix
144
Specifications
Items
Noise Levelbc
Description
Ready mode
Less than 32 dB (A)
Print mode
• CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 50 dB (A)
• CLX-626x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
Copy mode Scanner glass
• CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
• CLX-626x series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Document feeder • CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
• CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: Less than 54 dB (A)
• CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: Less than 54 dB (A)
Scan mode
Scanner glass
• CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
• CLX-626x series: Less than 54 dB (A)
Document feeder • CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 52 dB (A)
• CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD: Less than 54 dB (A)
• CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xFW: Less than 54 dB (A)
Temperature
Humidity
Power ratingd
Operation
10 to 30 °C (50 to 86 °F)
Storage (packed)
-20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)
Operation
20 to 80% RH
Storage (packed)
10 to 90% RH
110 volt models
AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models
AC 220 - 240 V
5. Appendix
145
Specifications
Items
Power
Average operating mode
e
consumption
Description
• CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 380 W
• CLX-626x series: Less than 450 W
Ready mode
• CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series: Less than 50 W
• CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR: Less than 16 W
• CLX-626xFW: Less than 18 W
Power save mode
• CLX-419xN/CLX-419xFN/C145xN: Less than 1.0 W
• CLX-419xFW/C145x FW/C186xFW: Less than 3.6 W (Wi-Fi Direct off: Less than 2.4W)
• CLX-626xND/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR: Less than 1.0 W
• CLX-626xFW: Less than 2.4 W
Power off modef
Less than 0.1 W
Network Standby Mode (All
Port Activation)
• CLX-419xFN/CLX-419xN/C145xN: Less than 3.75 W
• C186xFW: Less than 4.89 W
• CLX-626xFD: Less than 2.22 W
• CLX-626xFR/CLX-626xND: Less than 3.02 W
• CLX-626xFW: Less than 3.4 W
Wirelessg
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Module
SPW-B4319U
Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset.
Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
China only: If the equipment's noise is louder than 63 db (A) ,the equipment should be placed in region of relatively independent advice.
See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.
The power consumption may be affected by the machine’s status, setting conditions, operating environment, and measuring equipment and method the country uses.
Power consumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected.
Wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
5. Appendix
146
Specifications
2
Print media specifications
Weight/Capacitya
Type
Size
Dimensions
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Tray1
Plain paper bc
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
US Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
ISO B5
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)
A6
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
70 to 89 g/m2 (19 to
24 lbs bond)
70 to 89 g/m2 (19 to
24 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to
24 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to
24 lbs bond)
• 250 sheets of 80 g/
• 1 sheet
• Tray1: 250 sheets of
• 50 sheets
2
m (21 lbs bond)
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)
Manual feeder
CLX-626x series
2
80 g/m (21 lbs bond)
• Optional tray: 520
sheets of 80 g/m2
(20 lbs bond)
70 to 89 g/m2 (19 to
24 lbs bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/
m2 (21 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to
24 lbs bond)
• 150 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
5. Appendix
147
Specifications
Weight/Capacitya
Type
Size
Dimensions
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Tray1
Envelope
Manual feeder
CLX-626x series
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
Envelope
Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to
24 lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to
24 lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to
24 lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to
24 lbs bond)
Envelope
No. 10
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
• 20 sheets
• 1 sheet
• 20 sheets
• 5 sheets
Envelope
No. 9
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)
Not available in optional
tray.
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Thick paperbc
Thicker
paperbc
Envelope C5
162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)
Envelope C6
114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)
Refer to the Plain paper section
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
90 to 104 g/m2 (24 to
28 lbs bond)
90 to 104 g/m2 (24
to 28 lbs bond)
91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28
lbs bond)
91 to 105 g/m2 (24 to
28 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets of 105 g/
• 1 sheet
• 50 sheets of 105 g/m2
(28 lbs bond)
• 10 sheets
164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to
59 lbs bond)
164 to 220 g/m2 (43
to 59 lbs bond)
164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to 59
lbs bond)
164 to 220 g/m2 (43 to
59 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets of 220 g/
• 1 sheet
• 50 sheets of 220 g/m2
(59 lbs bond)
• 10 sheets)
m2 (28 lbs bond)
Refer to the Plain paper section
2
m (59 lbs bond)
Not available in optional
tray.
5. Appendix
148
Specifications
Weight/Capacitya
Type
Thin paper
Size
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Dimensions
Refer to the Plain paper section
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Tray1
Manual feeder
60 to 69 g/m2 (16 to 19
lbs bond)
60 to 69 g/m2 (16 to
19 lbs bond)
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19
lbs bond)
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19
lbs bond)
• 250 sheets of 70 g/
• 1 sheet
• 250 sheets of 70 g/m2
(19 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24
lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to
24 lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24
lbs bond)
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24
lbs bond)
• 250 sheets of 80 g/
• 1 sheet
• 250 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets
2
m (19 lbs bond)
Cotton, Color,
Pre-printed
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
CLX-626x series
2
m (21 lbs bond)
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
Not available in optional
tray.
Recycled
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24
lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to
24 lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24
lbs bond)
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24
lbs bond)
• 250 sheets of 80 g/
• 1 sheet
• 250 sheets of 80 g/m2
(21 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets
138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to
39 lbs bond)
138 to 146 g/m2 (35
to 39 lbs bond)
138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to 39
lbs bond)
138 to 146 g/m2 (35 to
39 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets
• 1 sheet
• 50 sheets
• 10 sheets
m2 (21 lbs bond)
Transparency
Letter,
Legal, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section
Not available in optional
tray.
5. Appendix
149
Specifications
Weight/Capacitya
Type
Labels d
Card stock bc
Bond paper
Archive,
Punched
paper,
Letterhead
Size
Dimensions
Letter,
Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS
B5, ISO B5,
Executive,
A5
Refer to the Plain paper section
Letter,
Legal, US
Folio, A4, JIS
B5, ISO B5,
Executive,
A5
Refer to the Plain paper section
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
Refer to the
Plain paper
section
Refer to the Plain paper section
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
CLX-626x series
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to
40 lbs bond)
120 to 150 g/m2 (32
to 40 lbs bond)
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40
lbs bond)
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to
40 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets
• 1 sheet
• 50 sheets
• 10 sheets
Not available in optional
tray.
121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to
43 lbs bond)
121 to 163 g/m2 (32
to 43 lbs bond)
121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to 43
lbs bond)
121 to 163 g/m2 (32 to
43 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets
• 1 sheet
• 50 sheets
• 10 sheets
105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to
32 lbs bond)
105 to 120 g/m2 (28
to 32 lbs bond)
105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32
lbs bond)
105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to
32 lbs bond)
• 50 sheets
• 1 sheet
• 50 sheets
• 10 sheets
• 250 sheets
• 1 sheet
• 250 sheets
• 50 sheets
5. Appendix
150
Specifications
Weight/Capacitya
Type
Size
Glossy Photo b Letter, A4,
Postcard 4x6
Dimensions
Refer to the Plain paper section
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
CLX-626x series
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to
35 lbs bond)
111 to 130 g/m2 (30
to 35 lbs bond)
111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to 35
lbs bond) for tray1
111 to 130 g/m2 (30 to
35 lbs bond)
• 30 sheets
• 1 sheet
• Tray1: 30 sheets
• 5 sheets
• Optional tray: 50
sheets
Refer to the Plain paper section
131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to
47 lbs bond)
131 to 175 g/m2 (35
to 47 lbs bond)
131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to 47
lbs bond)
131 to 175 g/m2 (35 to
47 lbs bond)
• 30 sheets
• 1 sheet
• Tray1: 30 sheets
• 5 sheets
• Optional tray: 50
sheets
Refer to the Plain paper section
176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to
59 lbs bond)
176 to 220 g/m2 (47
to 59 lbs bond)
176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to 59
lbs bond)
176 to 220 g/m2 (47 to
59 lbs bond)
• 30 sheets
• 1 sheet
• Tray1: 30 sheets
• 5 sheets
• Optional tray: 50
sheets
5. Appendix
151
Specifications
Weight/Capacitya
Type
Size
Minimum size (custom)
Dimensions
• Tray1: 98 x 127 mm (3.86 x 5
inches)
CLX-419x series/C145x series/C186x series
Tray1
Manual feeder
Tray1/ Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to
59 lbs bond)
60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16
to 59 lbs bond)
• 60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to
59 lbs bond) for tray1
60 to 220 g/m2 ( 16 to
59 lbs bond)
• Optional tray: 148.5 x 210 mm
(5.85 x 8.27inches)
• Multi-Purpose tray/ Manual
Feeder: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5
inches)
Maximum size (custom)
a.
b.
c.
d.
CLX-626x series
• 60 to 163 g/m2 ( 16 to
43 lbs bond) for
optional tray.
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
Post card 4 x 6 is supported for tray1, Manual feeder, or Multi-purpose tray.
Index card (3x5) is supported for Manual feeder and Multi-purpose tray.
The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
5. Appendix
152
Specifications
3
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Requirement (recommended)
Operating system
CPU
RAM
free HDD space
Windows® XP
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB (256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows Server® 2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB (512 MB)
1.25 GB to 2 GB
Windows Server® 2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB (2 GB)
10 GB
Windows Vista®
Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz
512 MB (1 GB)
15 GB
Windows® 7
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
1 GB (2 GB)
16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2008 R2
Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
512 MB (2 GB)
10 GB
Windows® 8
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
2 GB (2 GB)
20 GB
Windows® 8.1
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).
512 MB (2 GB)
32GB
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows Server® 2012
Intel® Pentium® IV 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)
Windows Server® 2012 R2
5. Appendix
153
Specifications
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.
• Users who have administrator rights can install the software.
• Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
Mac
Requirements (Recommended)
Operating system
CPU
Mac OS X 10.4
Mac OS X 10.5
RAM
Free HDD space
• Intel® processors
• 128 MB for a powerPC based Mac (512 MB)
• PowerPC G4/G5
• 512 MB for an Intel-based Mac (1 GB)
• Intel® processors
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
1 GB
• 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/G5
Mac OS X 10.6
• Intel® processors
1 GB (2 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.7-10.9
• Intel® processors
2 GB
4 GB
5. Appendix
154
Specifications
Linux
Items
Requirements
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6
Fedora 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19
OpenSUSE 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3
Operating system
Ubuntu 10.04, 10.10, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04, 12.10, 13.04
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11
Debian 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 7.1
Mint 13, 14, 15
CPU
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM
512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space
1 GB (2 GB)
Unix
Items
Requirements
Sun Solaris 9, 10, 11 (x86, SPARC)
Operating system
HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 7.1 (PowerPC)
Free HDD space
Up to 100 MB
5. Appendix
155
Specifications
4
Network environment
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Items
Network interface
Specifications
• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan
• 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN
Network operating system
• Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista®, Windows® 7, Windows Server® 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 -10.9 (Mac OS X 10.4: CLX-419x series/CLX-626x series only)
• UNIX OS
Network protocols
• TCP/IPv4
• DHCP, BOOTP
• DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
• Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)
Wireless security
• Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK)
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES
5. Appendix
156
Regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with
several regulatory statements.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
5
Laser safety statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 608251 : 2007.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service
condition.
Warning
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage
your eyes.
6
Ozone safety
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good
ventilation.
5. Appendix
157
Regulatory information
7
9
Mercury Safety
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal
Laws.(U.S.A. only)
Recycling
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an
environmentally responsible manner.
8
Power saver
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that
reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://
www.energystar.gov
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be on
your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified.
5. Appendix
158
Regulatory information
10
11
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)
China only
(Applicable in countries with separate collection
systems)
Website: http://www.samsung.com/cn/support/location/
supportServiceLocation.do?page=SERVICE.LOCATION
襦 愤縑趀爮闭
賉帞
蜷筨愤竖爮襔*%
縑趀绌裎
術賉縑聱ポM9śJマ
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the
sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe
recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for
disposal.
5. Appendix
159
Regulatory information
(The United States of America only)
14
Radio frequency emissions
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or
call, (877) 278 - 0799
12
State of California Proposition 65 Warning (US Only)
13
Taiwan only
FCC information to the user
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
•
This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
5. Appendix
160
Regulatory information
•
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
15
United States of America
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Canadian radio interference regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and
Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et
Sciences Canada.
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
5. Appendix
161
Regulatory information
17
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
Germany only
18
Turkey only
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
19
16
Thailand only
Russia / Kazakhstan / Belarus only
This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.
20
Canada only
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables
d’Industrie Canada.
5. Appendix
162
Regulatory information
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity
to maintain uninterrupted service
21
22
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission the following information:
1 the date and time of transmission
2 identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
message; and
3 telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity
or individual.
Ringer Equivalence Number
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
5. Appendix
163
Regulatory information
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that
they:
a promptly notify the customer.
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
•
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
•
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
machine.
•
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or
telephone and electronic specialty stores.
•
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
•
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
•
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
23
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
5. Appendix
164
Regulatory information
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded
plug.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
24
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
Declaration of conformity (European countries)
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you
plug it into a socket.
Approvals and Certifications
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xN/
C145xN/CLX-626xND] is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Low Voltage
Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC).
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [CLX-419xFN/CLX419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFD/CLX-626xFR/CLX626xFW] is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or
colored black.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
5. Appendix
165
Regulatory information
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
representative.
EC Certification
European radio approval information (for products
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label
to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European
countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained
in this document.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for
use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a
Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the
system label.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European
Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European states qualified under wireless approvals:
EU countries
European states with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, this equipment may only be used indoors.
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time
5. Appendix
166
Regulatory information
25
Israel only
26
Regulatory compliance statements
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact
during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.
Wireless guidance
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of
considerations while operating a wireless device.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of
common restrictions are listed below:
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be
allowed.
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with
equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations
require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane.
IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth
communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless
communication.
5. Appendix
167
Regulatory information
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and
Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples
where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in
environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless
devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or
turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on
the use of a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields
are in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
5. Appendix
168
Regulatory information
27
China only
᳝ᆇ⠽䋼
5. Appendix
169
Copyright
© 2014 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
•
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
•
Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
•
Google, Picasa, Google Cloud Print, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
•
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S and other countries.
•
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
•
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
The software included in this product contains open source software. You may obtain the complete
corresponding source code for a period of three years after the last shipment of this product by sending an email
to mailto:oss.request@samsung.com. It is also possible to obtain the complete corresponding source code in a
physical medium such as a CD-ROM; a minimal charge will be required.
QR code
The following URL http://opensource.samsung.com/opensource/Samsung_C145x_C1860_CLX4190_CLX-6260_Series/seq/32 leads to the download page of the source code made available and open
source license information as related to this product. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this
information.
REV. 9.05
5. Appendix
170
User’s Guide
ADVANCED
ADVANCED
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.
BASIC
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting
on Windows.
CLX-419x series
CLX-626x series
C145x series
C186x series
ADVANCED
1. Software Installation
3. Useful Setting Menus
Installation for Mac
175
Before you begin reading a chapter
251
Reinstallation for Mac
176
Print
252
Installation for Linux
177
Copy
253
Reinstallation for Linux
178
Fax
259
Scan
264
System setup
269
Admin setup
283
Eco
284
Direct USB
285
2. Using a Network-Connected
Machine
Useful network programs
180
Wired network setup
181
Installing driver over the network
184
IPv6 configuration
192
Wireless network setup
195
Altitude adjustment
287
Samsung Mobile Print
237
Storing email address
288
Using the NFC feature
238
Entering various characters
290
AirPrint
245
Setting up the fax address book
291
Google Cloud Print™
247
Registering authorized users
295
Printing features
296
Scan features
313
Fax features
322
4. Special Features
172
ADVANCED
Using shared folder features
331
Scanning problems
373
Using optional device features
332
Faxing problems
375
Operating system problems
377
5. Useful Management Tools
Accessing management tools
335
Easy Capture Manager
336
Samsung Easy Color Manager
337
Samsung AnyWeb Print
338
Easy Eco Driver
339
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
340
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
344
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
345
Using Samsung Printer Status
348
Using Samsung Printer Experience
350
6. Troubleshooting
Paper feeding problems
358
Power and cable connecting problems
359
Printing problems
360
Printing quality problems
364
Copying problems
372
173
1. Software Installation
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network
connected machine’s driver (see "Installing driver over the network" on page 184).
• Installation for Mac
175
• Reinstallation for Mac
176
• Installation for Linux
177
• Reinstallation for Linux
178
• If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine’s driver (see
"Installing the driver locally" on page 32).
• Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).
Installation for Mac
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads)
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and
click Continue.
If your machine supports fax, click Add Fax button to select your fax and
add it to your fax list
12
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
7
After the installation is finished, click Close.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
1. Software Installation
175
Reinstallation for Mac
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1
Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Printer Software
Uninstaller.
2
3
4
5
To uninstall printer software, click Continue.
Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall.
Enter the password and click OK.
After the uninstallation is finished, click Close.
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility
or Print & Fax.
1. Software Installation
176
Installation for Linux
You need to download the Linux software packages from the Samsung website
to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
8
9
10
11
When the installation is finished, launch printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program).
Click Add button.
Select your printer.
Click the Forward button and add it to your system.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
3
Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
4
5
6
Extract the package.
7
Proceed with the installation.
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
package to.
Move to uld folder.
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as a root, execute
the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")
1. Software Installation
177
Reinstallation for Linux
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
Open Terminal program.
1
2
3
Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package.
4
Proceed with the uninstallation.
Execute "./uninstall.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root,
execute the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./uninstall.sh")
1. Software Installation
178
2. Using a NetworkConnected Machine
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.
• Useful network programs
180
• Wired network setup
181
• Installing driver over the network
184
• IPv6 configuration
192
• Wireless network setup
195
• Samsung Mobile Print
237
• Using the NFC feature
238
• AirPrint
245
• Google Cloud Print™
247
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by
model" on page 7).
Useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
• Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
2
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network
machines from any site with corporate internet access.
•
Download this program from Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com
> find your product > Support or Downloads).
1
SyncThru™ Web Service
3
SetIP wired network setup
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the
following tasks (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
•
Check the supplies information and status.
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
•
Customize machine settings.
•
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)" on page 181.
•
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain
person's email automatically.
•
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)" on page 182.
•
See "IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)" on page 183.
•
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to
various network environments.
• The machine that does not support the network port, it will not be able
to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
• TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
180
Wired network setup
4
5
Printing a network configuration report
Setting IP address
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set
up a network.
• The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
• TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
•
The machine has the display screen: Press the
(Menu) button on the
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)
control panel and select Network > Network Configuration.
•
The machine has the touch screen: Press Setup from the Main screen >
Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Network Configuration.
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC
address and IP address.
The following instructions may differ for your model.
For example:
•
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78
•
IP Address: 169.254.192.192
1
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and
install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or
Downloads).
2
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
181
Wired network setup
3
4
5
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Mac)
Turn on the machine.
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences > Security > Firewall.
6
Click the
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IP configuration window.
7
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
The following instructions may vary from your model.
1
2
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
8
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
•
4
5
6
7
For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
182
Wired network setup
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System
Preferences or Administrator.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
11
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Set IP Address button.
12
13
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
Click the
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/
IP configuration window.
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
1
2
Download the SetIP program from the Samsung web site and extract it.
3
4
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
14
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file in cdroot/Linux/noarch/
at_opt/share/utils folder.
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by
a network manager before proceeding.
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report
(see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181) and enter it
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes
0015992951A8.
5
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration
Report.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
183
Installing driver over the network
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
• The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
•
You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the
software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For windows, select the printer driver and software in the Select
Software to Install window.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
6
•
Windows
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
The firewall software might be blocking network communication. efore
connecting the device to the network, disable the computer’s firewall.
1
2
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
For Windows 8,
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
5
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
184
Installing driver over the network
From the Windows 8 Start Screen
3
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
• The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if
your computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually
download the V4 driver from Samsung website, www.samsung.com >
find your product > Support or downloads.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the
Windows Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows
Store.
a From Charms, select Search.
b Click Store.
c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
d Click Install.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see "Printing a
network configuration report" on page 229).
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
2
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
185
Installing driver over the network
Silent installation Mode
Command- line
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation
by typing /s or /S in the command window.
Command-line Parameters
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be
operated solely.
Command- line
/s or
/S
Definition
Starts silent installation.
Description
Installs machine drivers
without prompting any UIs
or user intervention.
/p”<port name>” or
Definition
Specifies printer port.
/P”<port name>”
Network Port will be
created by use of
Standard TCP/IP
Port monitor. For
local port, this port
must exist on
system before
being specified by
command.
Description
Printer port name can be
specified as IP address,
hostname, USB local port
name, IEEE1284 port name
or network path.
For example:
•
/p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
means IP address for
network printer. /
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /
p”hostname”
• /
p"\\computer_name\sha
red_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared
_printer" in where,
"\\computer_name\shar
ed_printer" or
"\\xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\shared
_printer" means the
network path to the
printer by entering two
slashes, the computer
name or local IP address
of the PC sharing the
printer, and then the
share name of the
printer.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
186
Installing driver over the network
Command- line
/a”<dest_path>” or
/A”<dest_path>”
Definition
Specifies destination path
for installation.
The destination
path should be a
fully qualified path.
Description
Since machine drivers
should be installed on the
OS specific location, this
command applies to only
application software.
Command- line
Definition
Description
Uses existing machine
driver files to create printer
instance if it is already
installed.
This command provides a
way to install a printer
instance that uses installed
printer driver files without
installing an additional
driver.
Removes only specified
printer instance and not the
driver files.
This command provides a
way to remove only
specified printer instance
from your system without
effecting other printer
drivers. It will not remove
printer driver files from your
system.
Uninstalls all device drivers
and applications from your
system.
This command will remove
all installed device drivers
and application software
from your system.
/v”<share name>” or Shares installed machine
and add other available
/V”<share name>”
platform drivers for Point &
Print.
It will install all supported
Windows OS platform’s
machine drivers to system
and share it with specified
<share name> for point and
print.
/x or
/X
/up”<printer
name>” or
/n”<Printer name>”
or
/N”<Printer name>”
/nd or
/ND
Specifies printer name.
Printer instance shall be
created as specified printer
name.
With this parameter, you
can add printer instances as
your wishes.
Commands not to set the
installed driver as a default
machine driver.
It indicates installed
machine driver will not be
the default machine driver
on your system if there are
one or more printer drivers
installed. If there is no
installed machine driver on
your system, then this
option won’t be applied
because Windows OS will
set installed printer driver as
a default machine driver.
/UP”<printer
name>”
/d or
/D
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
187
Installing driver over the network
7
Command- line
/o or
/O
/h, /H or /?
Definition
Description
Opens Printers and Faxes
folder after installation.
This command will open
Printers and Faxes folder
after the silent installation.
Mac
CLX-419x series/CLX-626x series: For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download
from the Samsung website to install the printer software (http://
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
Shows Command-line Usage.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
188
Installing driver over the network
7
8
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
8
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
Select Network Connected Printer(Wired or Wireless) on the Printer
Connection Type and click Continue.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
11
Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer
list.
2
3
Copy the Unified Linux Driver package to your system.
4
5
6
Extract the package.
12
13
14
Click IP and select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
15
If Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software
and your machine name in Print Using.
16
17
Click Add.
Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the
package to.
Move to uld folder.
Execute "./install.sh" command (If you're not logged in as root, execute
the command with "sudo" as "sudo ./install.sh")
7
8
Proceed with the installation.
9
Click the Add button.
After the installation is finished, click Close.
When the installation is finished, launch Printing utility(Go to System >
Administration > Printing menu or execute "system-config-printer"
command in Terminal program).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
189
Installing driver over the network
10
11
Select AppSocket/HP JetDirect and enter your machine's IP address.
2
“su -”
Click the Forward button and add it to your system.
3
9
UNIX
• Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before
installing the UNIX printer driver (see "Operating System" on page 7).
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver
package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver
package from the Samsung website (http://www.samsung.com > find your
product > Support or Downloads).
4
1
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer
Driver package to your computer.
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.
“gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -”
5
6
Go to the unpacked directory.
Run the install script.
“./install –i”
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the
UNIX Printer Driver package.
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the
installer script.
Installing the UNIX printer driver package
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.
• The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not
type “”.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Operating System" on page 7).
Acquire root privileges.
7
8
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results.
Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add
Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to
the following procedures.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
190
Installing driver over the network
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two
commands on the root terminal:
“accept <printer_name>”
1
2
3
Type the name of the printer.
4
5
6
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the
Type field. This is optional.
“enable <printer_name>”
Uninstalling the printer driver package
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.
b Select the printer to be deleted.
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.
To re-install it, use the command “. /install –i” to reinstall the binaries.
Setting up the printer
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this
window according to the following steps:
7
8
9
10
11
12
Specify the printer location in the Location field.
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris
OS.
Select Copies to set the number of copies.
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.
Click OK to add the printer.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
191
IPv6 configuration
10
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7 or "Menu
overview" on page 36).
From the control panel
Activating IPv6
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
• If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with
FE80).
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network
router.
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
•
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
1
Select
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the
control panel.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
(IPv6) > IPv6 Activate on the touch screen.
2
3
Select On and press OK.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
When you install the printer driver, do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6. We
recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
192
IPv6 configuration
DHCPv6 address configuration
11
From the SyncThru™ Web Service
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following
options for default dynamic host configuration.
• Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36).
Activating IPv6
1
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter
the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and
press the Enter key or click Go.
2
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for
some models.
1
Select
(Menu) > Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the
control panel.
Or select Setup> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > TCP/IP
(IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config on the touch screen.
2
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
Press OK to select the required value you want.
•
DHCPv6 address: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
3
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse
cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network
Settings.
4
5
6
7
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.
Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6.
Click the Apply button.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
193
IPv6 configuration
• You can also set the DHCPv6.
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
• To manually set the IPv6 address:
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text
box is activated. Enter the rest of the address
(e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A
through F).
IPv6 address configuration
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (see "Printing a network configuration report" on
page 181).
3
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address
starts with FE80).
•
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
•
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
•
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
194
Wireless network setup
• Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless
networking may not be available depending on the model (see "Features
by model" on page 7).
• If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network settings
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
Wireless network name and network password
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up,
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Password are
created for the network. Ask your network administrator about this information
before proceeding with the machine installation.
12
Getting started
Understanding your network type
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the
machine at a time.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
Ad hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless
computer and wireless machine communicate directly.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
195
Wireless network setup
13
Introducing wireless set up methods
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting method from the below table.
• Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country.
• If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless network" on page 234).
• It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points. If you do not set the password on Acess Points, they might be exposed to illegal access
from unknown machine including PCs, smart phones and printers. Refer to the Access Point user guide for password settings.
CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW
Set up method
Connecting method
From the computer
Description & Reference
Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 202.
Windows user, see "Access point without a USB cable (recommended)" on page 205.
• Mac user, see "Access point via USB cable" on page 216.
• Mac user, see "Access point without a USB cable (recommended)" on page 218.
With Access Point
See "Using a network cable" on page 229.
From the machine’s control panel
• See "Machines with a display (or touch) screen" on page 199.
• See "Machines without a display screen" on page 200.
See "Using the menu button or touch screen" on page 202.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
196
Wireless network setup
Set up method
Without Access Point
Connecting method
From the computer
Description & Reference
Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 208.
Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 221.
Wi-Fi Direct setup
See "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232.
CLX-626xFW
Set up method
Connecting method
From the computer
Description & Reference
Windows user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 210.
Mac user, see "Access point via USB cable (recommended)" on page 223.
See "Using a network cable" on page 229.
With Access Point
From the machine’s control panel
• See "Machines with a display (or touch) screen" on page 199.
• See "Machines without a display screen" on page 200.
See "Using the menu button or touch screen" on page 202.
Without Access Point
From the computer
Windows user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 208.
Mac user, see "Ad hoc via USB cable" on page 221.
Wi-Fi Direct setup
See "Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
197
Wireless network setup
Choosing your type
14
Using the WPS button
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by
pressing the
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer.
• If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode,
make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine.
Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to
connect to the access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the
access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide
of the access point (or wireless router) you are using.
• When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings
may change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless
security settings. The option name may differ depending on the access
point (or wireless router) you are using.
using the
(WPS) button on the control panel.
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the
(WPS) button on the
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a WiFi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a
typical wireless network environment.
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, follow the next
procedure:
Items to prepare
•
Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™ (WPS).
•
Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).
•
Networked computer (PIN mode only)
a Press Setup from the Main screen.
b Press Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS
Settings.
c Select the setup method you want.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
198
Wireless network setup
Machines with a display (or touch) screen
Connecting in PBC mode
1
2
3
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings.
Press PBC (or Connect via PBC).
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
Connecting in PIN mode
1
For models that have the touch screen on the control panel, press Setup
> Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup > Wireless > WPS Settings.
2
3
4
Press PIN (or Connect via PIN).
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:
b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
a Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or
wireless router).
b Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.
c AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,
the AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
5
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
Information window appears showing 2 minutes connection processing
time.
4
Press OK when the confirmation window appears.
c SSID Type: After completing the wireless network connection
process, the AP’s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display.
5
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
199
Wireless network setup
Machines without a display screen
Connecting in PBC mode
1
1
2
Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than
4 seconds until the status LED stays on.
The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 181).
In ready mode, press and hold the
(Stop or Stop/Clear) button on
the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN.
Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4
seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.
The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks
slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the
access point (or wireless router).
2
Connecting in PIN mode
3
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eightdigit PIN.
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to
the access point (or wireless router).
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless
network, the WPS LED light stays on.
4
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
200
Wireless network setup
Re-connecting to a network
Disconnecting from a network
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect
to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless
connection settings and address.
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the
the control panel for more than two seconds.
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the
wireless network:
• The machine is turned off and on again.
• The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.
(WPS) button on
•
When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately
disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off.
•
When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the
current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the
wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS
LED turns off.
Canceling the connection process
To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to
the wireless network, press and release the
(Stop or Stop/Clear) on the
control panel. You need to wait 2 minutes to re-connect to the wireless
network.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
201
Wireless network setup
15
16
Setup using Windows (CLX-419x series/C145x series/
C186x series)
Using the menu button or touch screen
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "CLX-419xFW/CLX626xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW" on page 42).
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the
network" on page 184).
1
2
Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless >
WLAN Settings on the touch screen.
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.
•
•
Search List (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic.
The machine will display a list of available networks from which to
choose. After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the
corresponding security key.
Custom: In this mode, users can give or edit manually their own SSID
, or choose the security option in detail.
Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD: If
you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Samsung
Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD(see "Accessing management
tools" on page 335).
Access point via USB cable
Items to prepare
•
Access point
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network
1
2
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
202
Wireless network setup
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
5
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
6
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
4
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
203
Wireless network setup
7
Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method
screen. Then, click Next.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP AES).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
8
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security settings.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
204
Wireless network setup
9
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appear.
Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Access point without a USB cable (recommended)
Items to prepare
•
WiFi-enabled PC running Windows 7 or higher and an access point (router)
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
While setting the wireless network, the machine uses PC’s wireless LAN. You
might not be able to connect to the Internet.
• Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports
this feature.
• Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
• Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
• Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
10
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
205
Wireless network setup
Creating the infrastructure network
1
2
4
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
5
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
206
Wireless network setup
6
Select Using a direct wireless connection on the Select the Wireless
Setup Method screen. Then, click Next.
Even if your computer is running Windows 7 or hight, you cannot use this
feature if your PC does not support wireless network. Set the wireless
network using a USB cable (see "Access point via USB cable" on page 202).
If below screen appears, press the
panel within 2 minutes.
•
7
8
(WPS) button from the control
For the model with a touch screen, press Accept on the touch
screen.
When the wireless network set up is completed, click Next.
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
207
Wireless network setup
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows
1
2
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Items to prepare
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
208
Wireless network setup
4
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security enabled.
5
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
6
7
Select Using a USB cable on the Select the Wireless Setup Method
screen. Then, click Next.
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
8
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
209
Wireless network setup
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the
static IP address.
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
17
Setup using Windows (CLX-626x series)
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:
9
10
Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD: If
you have installed the printer driver once, you can access the Samsung
Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD(see "Accessing management
tools" on page 335).
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
Items to prepare
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:
•
Access point
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
•
Network-connected computer
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
210
Wireless network setup
Creating the infrastructure network
1
2
3
4
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
5
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
6
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
7
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
211
Wireless network setup
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on a WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key
(generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase), which is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
8
When the network connection window appears, disconnect the network
cable. Then, click Next. The network cable connection can interfere with
searching for wireless devices.
9
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appear.
If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If
not, click just Next.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP AES).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security settings.
• Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
• Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
• Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
212
Wireless network setup
10
When the wireless network set up is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
3
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > All programs >
Accessories > Run.
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and click OK.
Items to prepare
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows
1
2
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search > Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing
“X” with the letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window
appears, click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
4
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine.
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
213
Wireless network setup
5
Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type
screen. Then, click Next.
7
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
6
On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time? screen, select
Yes, I will set up my printer's wireless network. Then, click Next.
If your printer is already connected on the network, select No, my
printer is already connected to my network.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security enabled.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
214
Wireless network setup
8
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
9
10
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
11
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the
static IP address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
215
Wireless network setup
18
Setup using Mac (CLX-419x series/C145x series/
C186x series)
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
Access point via USB cable
Items to prepare
•
Access point
•
Network-connected printer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads)
•
4
5
6
7
8
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
216
Wireless network setup
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
11
If Wireless Settings screen appears, select Using a USB cable and click
Next.
If the screen does not appear, go to step 15.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
217
Wireless network setup
12
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
13
• Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports
this feature.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
• Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP, AES)
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
• Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
14
15
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Click Next.
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
Access point without a USB cable (recommended)
Items to prepare
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
•
WiFi-enabled Mac running Mac OS 10.7 or higher and an access point
(router)
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security enabled.
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
218
Wireless network setup
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
7
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
219
Wireless network setup
11
If Wireless Settings screen appears, select Using a direct wireless
connection and click Next.
If below screen appears, press the
within 2 minutes.
If the screen does not appear, go to step 13.
(WPS) button from the control panel
• For the model with a touch screen, press Accept on the touch screen.
12
13
When the wireless network set up is completed, click Next.
After the installation is finished, click Close.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
220
Wireless network setup
Ad hoc via USB cable
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
Items to prepare
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
•
4
5
6
7
8
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
Enter the password and click OK.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
221
Wireless network setup
10
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security setting.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
11
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is casesensitive).
12
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
• Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
222
Wireless network setup
13
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the
machine when configuring the wireless network.
14
15
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP
address.
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
page 175).
19
Setup using Mac (CLX-626x series)
Access point via USB cable (recommended)
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
Items to prepare
•
Access point
•
Network-connected printer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
223
Wireless network setup
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads)
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
7
8
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•
4
5
6
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
224
Wireless network setup
11
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select
the name (SSID) of the access point you want to use and click Next.
12
If your printer supports Wi-Fi Direct and this function is disabled, its
corresponding screen will appears.
If you want to enable Wi-Fi Direct, check the checkbox, and click Next. If
not, click just Next.
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point
(SSID is case-sensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the
print server based on the WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret
key (generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually
configured on the access point and each of its clients.
• Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,
TKIP, AES)
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
(see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page 232).
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
• Wi-Fi Direct Name: The default Wi-Fi Direct Name is the model name
and the maximum length is 22 characters.
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has
security enabled.
• Password setting is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.
Enter the Network Password of the access point (or router).
13
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
225
Wireless network setup
14
Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished,
click Quit.
Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
For Mac OS X 10.4, you need to download from the Samsung website to
install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com > find your product >
Support or Downloads).
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
page 175).
1
powered on.
Ad hoc via USB cable
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
Items to prepare
•
Network-connected computer
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
USB cable
•
4
5
6
7
For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.
Click Continue.
Read the license agreement and click Continue.
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
226
Wireless network setup
8
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
11
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your
machine has searched appears. Click Advanced Setting.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.
9
10
Enter the password and click OK.
Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.
• Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name (SSID is casesensitive).
• Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.
• Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).
• Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may
not be used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key
can access the network.
• Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).
• Network Password: Enter the encryption network password value.
• Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption network
password value.
• WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate
WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network
has security setting.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
• WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
227
Wireless network setup
12
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the
settings and click Next.
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
13
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP
address.
14
15
• For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP).
• For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is shown as follows:
When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is
confirmed appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next..
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the
machine when configuring the wireless network.
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.
Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click
Quit.
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installation for Mac" on
page 175).
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
228
Wireless network setup
Printing a network configuration report
20
Using a network cable
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network
configuration report.
Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this
feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
• After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over
the network" on page 184).
• See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless
network, for information about your network configuration.
See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
See "Setting IP address" on page 181.
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
•
Access point
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.
•
Network-connected computer
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
Software CD that was provided with your machine
•
A machine installed with a wireless network interface
•
Network cable
Items to prepare
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
229
Wireless network setup
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if
you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom.
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection
status.
1
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If
not, connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
7
For example,
3
4
5
6
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
•
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless
network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect
to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is
case sensitive.
•
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
connections (see "Wireless network name and network password"
on page 195).
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
-
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the
access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID.
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
Click Wireless > Wizard.
8
Click Next.
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network password) and click Next.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
230
Wireless network setup
9
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If
the setup is right, click Apply.
21
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.
10
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive, and follow the
instructions in the window to set up the wireless network.
If your machine has a display, you can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the
machine’s control panel using the Network menu.
1
Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
4
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network
Settings.
6
Click Wireless > Custom.
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
231
Wireless network setup
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
22
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the
Wi-Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure
connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode.
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network
and a Wi-Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print
documents both from Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.
From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)
After the driver installation is complete, Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be
set and changes in the Wi-Fi Direct can be made.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows
and Mac OS users only.
• You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the
printer’s Wi-Fi Direct.
• The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct
networks do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP
services.
• The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct
is 3.
-
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Device Settings >
Network.
▪
Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable.
▪
Device Name: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your
printer on a wireless network. By default, the device name is the
model name.
▪
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is
used only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired
or wireless network. We recommend using the default local IP
address (the default local IP address of the printer for Wi-Fi Direct is
192.168.3.1 )
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
232
Wireless network setup
▪
▪
Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi
Direct group’s owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless
access point. We recommend activating this option.
• For Linux OS users,
- Print an IP network configuration report to check the output (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 181).
Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network
Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your
printer. You can configure a network password yourself, or can
remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated
by default.
From the machine (Machines with a display screen)
- Access SyncThru Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings
> Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
- Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct.
Setting up the mobile device
•
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the
mobile device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.
•
After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing
application (For example: Samsung Mobile printer) to print from your
smartphone.
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the
menu" on page 36 ).
•
Select Setup> Machine Setup >Next > Network Setup > Wireless > Wi-Fi
Direct on the touch screen.
•
Enable Wi-Fi Direct.
From the network-connected computer
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable
and configure Wi-Fi Direct from SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
Access SyncThru™ Web Service, select Settings > Network Settings >
Wireless > Wi-Fi Direct.
•
Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options.
• When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your
mobile device, select the printer and the printer's LED will blink. Press the
WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile
device.
•
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, you need to enter
the "Network Key" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
233
Wireless network setup
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error
23
Troubleshooting for wireless network
•
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB
cable and your machine’s power.
Problems during setup or driver installation
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network
Printers Not Found
•
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the
machine.
•
USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect
the machine to your computer using the USB cable.
•
The machine does not support wireless networking. Check the machine's
user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and
prepare a wireless network machine.
Connecting Failure - SSID Not Found
•
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired
network cable from your machine.
Connecting Failure - Assigning the IP address
•
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router) and machine.
PC Connection Error
•
The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
-
For a DHCP network environment
•
The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or
entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try
connecting again.
The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when
computer is configured to DHCP.
•
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode, the problem may be caused
by the automatically changed IP address. Compare the IP address between
the product's IP address and the printer port's IP address.
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
•
Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your
access point and machine.
How to compare:
1 Print the network information report of your printer, and then check the
IP address (see "Printing a network configuration report" on page 181).
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
234
Wireless network setup
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
2 Check the printer port's IP address from your computer.
a Click the Windows Start menu.
• For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search > Settings.
b For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
• For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
-
For example,
▪
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
▪
IP address: 169.254.133.43
▪
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
▪
Gateway: 169.254.133.1
Other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
•
You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time.
•
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be
turned on.
•
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from
the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the
signal.
•
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
For a Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured
to static address.
IP address: 169.254.133.42
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:
• For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
• For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
c Right-click your machine.
d For Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7/8 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer
drivers connected with selected printer.
e Click Port tab.
f Click Configure Port... button.
g Check if Printer Name or IP Address: is the IP address on the network
configuration Sheet.
3 Change the printer port's IP address if it is different from the network
information report's.
If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP,
Connect to a network printer. Then reconnect the IP address.
▪
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
235
Wireless network setup
•
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
•
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it
cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and
try searching for the machine again.
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista,
you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use
the wireless machine.
•
You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for
Samsung wireless network machines.
•
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
•
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
•
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless
signal.
•
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless
router) administrator.
•
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.
Register the product's MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on
the access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address
that is set with the MAC address. You can identify the MAC address of your
machine by printing a network configuration report (see "Printing a network
configuration report" on page 181).
•
•
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.
•
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave
oven and some Bluetooth devices.
•
Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router)
changes, you must do the product's wireless network setup again.
•
The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.
•
If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g.
•
If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may not
connect to your machine.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
236
Samsung Mobile Print
24
26
What is Samsung Mobile Print?
Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos,
documents, and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet. Samsung
Supported Mobile OS
•
Android OS 2.3 or higher
•
iOS 4.0 or higher
Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones
but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC. It connects your mobile device to a
network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi-Fi
access point. Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn’t
necessary – just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application, and it will
automatically detect compatible Samsung printers. Besides printing photos,
web pages, and PDFs, scanning is also supported. If you have a Samsung
multifunction printer, scan any document into a JPG, PDF, or PNG format for
quick and easy viewing on your mobile device.
25
Downloading Samsung Mobile Print
To download Samsung Mobile Print, go to the application store (Samsung
Apps, Play Store, App Store) on your mobile device, and just search for
“Samsung Mobile Print.” You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your
computer.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
237
Using the NFC feature
The NFC (Near Field Communication) printer allows you to directly print/scan/
fax from your mobile device just by holding your mobile device over the NFC tag
on your printer. It does not require installing print driver or connecting to an
access point. You just need NFC supported mobile device. In order to use this
feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed on your mobile device.
27
Requirements
•
• Depending on the material of the mobile device cover, NFC recognition
may not work properly.
Only Android OS 4.1 or higher will automatically enable the Wi-Fi Direct
feature on your mobile device when you enable the NFC feature. We
recommend you to upgrade your mobile device to Android OS 4.1 or higher
to use the NFC feature.
• Depending on the mobile device you are using, the transmission speed
may differ.
• This feature is available only for the model with a NFC tag (see "Machine
overview" on page 22).
• Using a cover or a battery other than the ones that came with the mobile
device, or a metal cover/sticker can block NFC.
NFC and Wi-Fi Direct enabled, Samsung Mobile Print app installed mobile
device with Android OS 4.0 or higher.
•
Wi-Fi Direct feature enabled printer (see "Setting up Wi-Fi Direct" on page
232).
• If NFC devices keep failing to communicate, remove and reinstall the
battery from the mobile device, then try again.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
238
Using the NFC feature
28
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
Printing
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232).
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
3
4
Select print mode.
Select the content you want to print.
If neccessary, change the print option by pressing the
.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
239
Using the NFC feature
5
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
29
Scanning
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232).
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
The printer starts printing.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
240
Using the NFC feature
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
5
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
3
4
Select scan mode.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
If necessary, change the scan option by pressing the
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
.
6
The printer starts scanning the content.
The scanned data is saved on your mobile device.
If you want to continue scanning, follow the instruction on the app screen.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
241
Using the NFC feature
30
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
Sending Fax
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer (see "Setting
the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing" on page 232).
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
3
4
Select fax mode.
Select the content you want to send fax.
If necessary, enter the fax number and change the fax option by pressing
the
.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
242
Using the NFC feature
5
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
31
Registering Google Cloud Printer
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
1
Check that NFC and Wi-Fi Direct features are enabled on your mobile
device and Wi-Fi Direct feature is enabled on your printer.
2
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the Samsung Mobile Print app to start.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
The printer starts faxing the content.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
• If your do not have Samsung Mobile Print app installed on your mobile
devices, it automatically connects to Samsung Mobile Print app
download page. Download the app and try again.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
243
Using the NFC feature
3
4
5
Select device status icon.
Select Google Cloud Print > Register Google Cloud Printer.
Tag the NFC tag on your mobile device (usually located on the back of
the mobile device) over the NFC tag(
) on your printer.
Wait a few seconds for the mobile device to connect to the printer.
• For some mobile devices, NFC tag might not be located at the back of the
mobile device. Check the location of the NFC antenna on your mobile
device before tagging.
• If error message about changed PIN number appears, enter a changed
PIN number and press OK. Follow the instruction on the app screen to
update the PIN number.
6
Confirm your printer in pop-up window.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
244
AirPrint
Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box
your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
4
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad,
and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS.
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the
AirPrint feature. You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following
methods.
1
2
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
5
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings.
6
Click Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP or mDNS .
32
Setting up AirPrint
Type in the ID and Password, then click Login. If it’s your first time
logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and
password. We recommend you to change the default password for
security reasons.
You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNS protocol.
Check whether the machine is connected to the network.
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,
3
Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
245
AirPrint
33
Printing via AirPrint
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
1
2
3
4
Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.
Touch the action icon(
).
Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.
Touch Print button. Print it out.
Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print summary,
click the print center icon (
) in multitasking area. You can click cancel in
the print center.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
246
Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
smart phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your
Google account with the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud
Print™ service. You can print your document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome
browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™ application on your mobile device, so you
don’t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device. Refer to the Google
website (http://www.google.com/cloudprint/learn/ or http://
support.google.com/cloudprint) for more information about Google Cloud
Print™.
the proxy’s IP and port number from Proxy Setting. Contact your network
service provider or network administrator for more information.
5
Confirm your printer in the pop-up window.
6
34
Click Register .
Click Finish.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Registering your Google account to the printer
Registering from Samsung Mobile Print app
Registering from the Chrome Browser
• Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
In order to use this feature, Samsung Mobile Print app needs to be installed
on your cell phone.
1
2
3
4
Open Samsung Mobile Print app from your mobile device.
Select device setting.
Select Google Cloud Print.
• You should create your Google account in the advance.
1
2
3
Open the Chrome browser.
Visit www.google.com.
Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail™ address.
Enter your printer’s name and description.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
247
Google Cloud Print™
4
Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key
or click Go.
5
Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
6
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and Password.
We recommend you to change the default password for security
reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will not
appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.
10
11
Click Finish printer registration.
Click Manage your printers.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.
If the network environment is using a proxy server, you need to configure
the proxy’s IP and port number from Settings > Network Settings >
Google Cloud Print > Proxy Setting. Contact your network service
provider or network administrator for more information.
7
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings > Google Cloud Print.
8
9
Enter your printer’s name and description.
Click Register.
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
248
Google Cloud Print™
35
Printing with Google Cloud Print™
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you
are using. You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™
service.
5
6
7
Tap the Cloud Print
button.
Set the printing options if you want.
Tap Click here to Print.
Printing from the Chrome browser
Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.
Printing from an application on mobile device
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from
Android mobile phone.
1
Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
If you do not have the application, download it from the application store
such as Android Market or App Store.
2
3
4
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Run Chrome.
Open the document or email that you want to print.
Click the wrench icon
in the browser’s top right corner.
Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.
Select Print with Google Cloud Print.
Click the Print button.
Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.
Tap the option
Tap the send
button of the document that you want to print.
button.
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine
249
3. Useful Setting Menus
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for advanced
machine setup.
• Before you begin reading a chapter
251
• Print
252
• Copy
253
• Fax
259
• Scan
264
• System setup
269
• Admin setup
283
• Eco
284
• Direct USB
285
Before you begin reading a chapter
This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features.
You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 36).
The following are tips for using this chapter
•
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing
or from the touch screen.
•
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
For models that do not have the
•
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.
(Menu)
(Menu) on the control panel, this feature is not applicable (see "Control panel overview" on page 26).
3. Useful Setting Menus
251
Print
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
•
Press
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Print Setup on the touch screen.
Item
Resolution
Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The
higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and
graphics.
Clear Text
Prints text darker than on a normal document.
Sets the emulation type and option.
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel.
Item
Emulation
Edge Enhance
It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics
for improving readability.
Trapping
It reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color
channels in color printing mode. Also black text will be
overprinted on other colors.
• Portrait
This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color
output.
Orientation
• Normal: This mode will generate printouts with
smooth tone over the entire page.
• Landscape
Screen
Copies
• Emulation Type: The machine language defines how
the computer communicates with the machine.
• Setup: Sets the detailed settings for the selected
emulation type.
Description
Selects the direction in which information is printed on a
page.
Description
You can enter the number of copies using the number
keypad.
• Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with
sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the
page.
• Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with
sharp details over the entire page.
Select Tray
Sets the select tray type.
3. Useful Setting Menus
252
Copy
1
Item
Copy feature
Description
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see
"Reduced or enlarged copy" on page 74).
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Reduce/Enlarge
If the machine is set to Eco mode, reduce and
enlarge features are not available.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
Or
(copy) >
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 73)
Original Type
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job (see "Original Type" on
page 73)
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Copy Default
on the touch screen.
•
Or press Copy > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
You can sets whether to use Auto color on or off.
Auto Color
Item
Description
Original Size
Sets the image size.
Copies
You can enter the number of copies using the number
keypad.
• On: Select this setting to automatically detect
whether the scanned document is in color or black
and white, and then select an appropriate color
setting.
Basic Copy
Copies can be started quickly.
Custom Copy
Copies can be customized through detailed options.
3. Useful Setting Menus
253
Copy
Item
Description
You can select the default color mode to use for copy
jobs.
Color Mode
• Auto: Select this setting to automatically detect
whether the scanned document is in color or black
and white, and then select an appropriate color
setting.
• Color: Select this setting to print the same as the
original image color.
• Mono: Select this setting to print the copy in black
and white, regardless whether the scanned
document is in color or in black and white.
Allows you to check the current tray settings and
change the settings if necessary.
Tray
Auto: You can set the machine to automatically
to the tray with the same sized paper when the
tray in use is empty.
Item
Description
Auto Fit Copy
Copies image to fit automatically to the paper size.
Layout
Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy, 2/4-up, etc.
ID Copy
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item
such as business card (see "ID card copying" on page
75).
• Collation
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you
make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page
document will print followed by a second complete
document.
• Collation Copy
• On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of
originals.
• Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual
pages.
You can apply the stamp feature.
Stamp
• Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, comment, or user ID, to
the copy output.
• Opacity: You can select the transparency.
• Position: Sets the position.
3. Useful Setting Menus
254
Copy
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire
book. If the book is too thick, lift the cover until its
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the
cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the cover open.
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4
pages onto one sheet of paper.
2
• N-up Copy
Item
1
• 2-up or 4-up
Description
• Off: Does not use this feature.
Book Copy
• Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the
book.
• Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the
book.
• Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of
the book.
This copy feature is available only when you
place originals on the scanner glass.
3. Useful Setting Menus
255
Copy
Item
Description
Item
• Adjust Bkgd.
Prints an image without its background. This copy
• Adjust Background feature removes the background color and can be
helpful when copying an original containing color in
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.
Description
Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and
staple marks along any of the four edges of a document.
• Off: Does not use this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
• Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the
more vivid the background is.
• Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter
the background is.
• Off: Does not use this feature.
Edge Erase
• SmallOriginal: rases the edge of the original if it is
small. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
• Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.
• Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper
which is black and horizontal, when you copy a
book. This feature is available only when you place
originals on the scanner glass.
• Border Erase: Enter the left, right, top, bottom
margin using Number keypad.
3. Useful Setting Menus
256
Copy
Item
Watermark
Description
Item
The watermark option allows you to print text over an
existing document. For example, you use it when you
want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or
“CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first
page or all pages of a document.
Description
• 2->1Sided
• 2->2Sided
Duplex (continue)
• 2->1Sided Rotated
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of
paper.
• 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints it on
one side of the paper.
• 1->2Sided
Duplex
• 1->2Sided Rotated
3. Useful Setting Menus
257
Copy
2
Copy Setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press
Or
(copy) >
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.
Item
Change Default
Description
The copy options can be set to those most frequently
used.
3. Useful Setting Menus
258
Fax
3
Item
Fax Feature
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Resolution
Description
The default document settings produce good results
when using typical text-based originals. However, if you
send originals that are of poor quality, or contain
photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce
a higher quality fax (see "Resolution" on page 80).
Selects the color mode in which you want to send the
fax.
Color Mode
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(fax) >
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
•
Or press Fax > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
• Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.
• Color: Transmits a fax in color.
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel.
This function is especially intended for two-sided
originals. You can select whether the machine sends
the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
only.
• 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
Item
Description
Original Size
Sets the image size.
Original Type
Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned.
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 81).
Duplex
• 2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the
originals on the DADF. If the machine cannot
detect the original on the DADF, it
automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
Memory Send
Fax can be customized through detailed options.
3. Useful Setting Menus
259
Fax
Item
Description
On Hook Dial
Access a dial tone to send fax.
Speed Dial Send
Fax image to destination from speed dial list.
Group Dial Send
Fax image to destination from group dial list.
Redial
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller
ID in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number
in edit mode (see "Redialing the fax number" on page
322).
Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax
to multiple destinations" on page 79).
Item
Send Forward
Receive Forward
• Delay Send
• Delayed Send
Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive
the fax, this feature may be useful.
• See "Forwarding a sent fax to another destination"
on page 324.
• See "Forwarding a received fax" on page 325.
Secure Receive
Stores the received fax in memory without printing out.
To print received documents, you need to enter the
password. You can prevent your received faxes from
being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving
in secure receiving mode" on page 329).
Cancel Job
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory
(see "Canceling a reserved fax job" on page 324).
Multi Send
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
Description
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you
will not be present (see "Delaying a fax transmission" on
page 323).
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
3. Useful Setting Menus
260
Fax
4
Item
Sending setup
• Fax Confirmation
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
• Fax Send
Confirmation
Description
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax
transmission was successfully completed or not.
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
•
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel.
Modem speed
Select the maximum modem speed you want if the
phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed. You
can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4, 12.0, 9.6 or 4.8 kbps.
Image TCR
Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of
the first page of the fax sent.
Dial Mode
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This
setting may not be available depending on your
country.
Toll Save
Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save on call
costs. This setting may not be available depending on
your country.
Setup Wizard
Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options
such as machine ID, fax number, etc.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Item
Redial Times
Description
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the
machine will not redial.
Redial Term
Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.
Prefix Dial
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials
before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful
for accessing a PABX exchange.
ECM Mode
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to
makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any
error. It may take more time.
3. Useful Setting Menus
261
Fax
5
Item
Receiving setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Rcv Start Code
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the
machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear
fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the
factory.
Auto Reduction
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the
size of the paper loaded in the machine.
Discard Size
Discards a specific length from the end of the received
fax.
DRPD Mode
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer
several different telephone numbers. You can set the
machine to recognize different ring patterns for each
number. This setting may not be available depending
on your country (see "Receiving faxes using DRPD
mode" on page 328).
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(fax) >
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax Default
on the touch screen.
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Fax Setup on the touch screen.
Item
Receive Mode
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel.
Description
Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper.
You can save the paper usage.
Selects the default fax receiving mode (see "Changing
the receive modes" on page 327).
Ring To Answer
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before
answering an incoming call.
Stamp RCV Name
Automatically prints the page number, and the date
and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
Description
• Off: Prints only one side of the paper.
Duplex Print
• Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
the binding will be the long edge.
• Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper; however,
the binding will be the short edge.
3. Useful Setting Menus
262
Fax
6
Change Default setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Change Default on the control
panel.
Item
Change Default
Description
The fax options can be set to those most frequently
used.
3. Useful Setting Menus
263
Scan
7
Item
Scan feature
• FTP Feature
• FTP Default
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
• FTP
• SMB Feature
• SMB Default
• SMB
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(scan) >
Or Scan to >
•
•
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
• USB Default
• USB Feature
Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 317).
Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You scan the
originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server
(see "Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 317).
Local PC
Sets scan destination to a usb-connected computer.
You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a
directory such as My Documents (see "Basic Scanning"
on page 77).
Network PC
Sets scan destination to a network-connected
computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned
image to a directory such as My Documents (see
"Scanning from network connected machine" on page
314).
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default
on the touch screen.
Item
Description
Description
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals
and save the scanned image to a USB device.
• USB
• Email Default
• Custom Email
• Scan to Email
Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the originals
and email the scanned image to destinations (see
"Scanning to email" on page 315).
3. Useful Setting Menus
264
Scan
Item
Description
Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If
you select JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF, you can select to scan
multiple pages. Depending on the selected scan type,
this option may not appear.
Item
Shared Folder
Description
Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You can create
and use the shared folder (see "Using shared folder
features" on page 331).
• Single-TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged
Image File Format), and several originals are scanned
as an each individual TIFF file.
• Multi-TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image
File Format), but several originals are scanned as one
file.
• Single-PDF: Scans the originals in PDF, and several
originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file.
File Format
• Multi-PDF: Scans originals in PDF, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
• Single-XPS: Scans the originals in XPS, and several
originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file.
• Multi-XPS: Scans originals in XPS, but several
originals are scanned as one file.
• JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
• XPS: This feature is only supported for the
devices that have mass storage.
• The file format JPEG cannot be selected in
the File Format option, if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
3. Useful Setting Menus
265
Scan
8
Item
Scan setup
Description
You can select the color options of scan outputs.
• Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per
pixel, 8 bits for each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
• Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image.
8 bits per pixel.
Color Mode
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(scan) >
Or Scan to >
• Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit
per pixel.
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Scan Default
on the touch screen.
•
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item
Darkness
Adjusts the brightness level to scan.
Description
Destination
Enter the destination’s information.
Change Default
The scan options can be set to those most frequently
used.
Original Size
Sets the image size.
Original Type
Sets the original document’s type.
Resolution
Sets the image resolution.
3. Useful Setting Menus
266
Scan
Item
Description
Item
You can set the machine to print server confirmation
result report.
Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper (1
Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides
of the paper (2 Sided Rotated).
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side
only.
Server Confirmation
• 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
Duplex
Description
If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
• 2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on
both sides, but the back is rotated 180 degrees.
You can set the machine to print email confirmation
result report.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, the
machine shows the window asking to place
another page. Load another original and press
Yes. When you finish, select No for this option.
File Policy
Email Confirmation
• If a report contains characters or fonts that
the machine does not support, Unknown
could be printed instead of the characters/
fonts in the report.
You can choose the policy for generating file name
before you proceed with the scan job through server or
USB memory device. If the server or the USB memory
device already has the same name you enter, you can
change the name, cancel the job, or overwrite it.
• Rename: The sent file is saved as a different file
name that is automatically programmed.
PDF Encryption
Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in
PDF format. Select On to encrypt the PDF file, and set
up a password. To open the file, users need to enter the
password
Subject
Sets an email’s subject.
From
Sets a sender’s email address.
• Overwrite: Overwrites the existing the file.
File Name
Makes a file name to store the scan data.
• If you select On-Error, the machine prints a
report only when a transmission is not
successful.
3. Useful Setting Menus
267
Scan
Item
Description
CC
Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient.
BCC
The same as CC but the recipient's name is not
displayed.
WSD
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the
connected computer if it supports the WSD (Web
Service for Device) feature.
3. Useful Setting Menus
268
System setup
9
Item
Machine setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Receive Mode
Selects the default fax receiving mode.
Receive code
This feature works best when you are using an extension
telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of
your machine. You can receive a fax from someone you
are talking to on the extension telephone, without going
to the fax machine. *9* is the remote receive code preset
at the factory (see "Receiving faxes with an extension
telephone" on page 328).
Select Country
Selects the country.
To change the menu options:
•
Press
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Initial Setup on the touch
screen.
Sound/Volume
Sets the sound/volume option.
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > select the menu item you want on the
touch screen.
Toner Status Alert
If toner in the cartridge has run out, a message informing
the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can
set the option for this message to appear or not.
•
Item
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel.
Description
Description
Machine ID
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Fax Number
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of
each fax page that you send.
Date & Time
Sets the date and time.
Clock Mode
Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and
24 hr.
3. Useful Setting Menus
269
System setup
Item
Description
You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the
memory. The machine overwrites the data with different
patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery.
ImageOverwrite
• Manual: When printing, copying, scanning, and
faxing, the machine temporarily uses memory space.
For security reasons, you can set the machine to
manually overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If
you want to secure memory space, you can manually
overwrite secure non-volatile memory.
Item
System Timeout
Sets the time that the machine remembers previously
used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine
restores the default copy settings.
Job Timeout
Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing
the last page of a print job that does not end with a
command to print the page.
When this option is "On", you can wake up the machine
from the power saving mode with the following actions:
• Automatic: When a job is completed, there are
temporary images left in the memory. For security
reasons, you can set the machine to automatically
overwrite secure non-volatile memory. If you want to
secure memory space, you can set the machine to
automatically overwrite secure non-volatile memory
• pressing any button on the control panel
• loading paper in a tray
• opening or closing the front cover
• pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in
Wakeup Event
Language
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control
panel display.
Default Mode
Sets the machine’s default mode among fax mode, copy
mode, or scan mode.
Default Paper Size
You can set the default paper size to use.
Description
• connecting a USB memory device (only for the models
that support USB memory devices)
If the machine does not have the touch screen,
you can wake up the machine from the power
saving mode by pressing any button on the
control panel regardless of this option’s setting.
Sets how long the machine waits before going to power
save mode.
Power Save
When the machine does not receive data for an extended
period of time, power consumption is automatically
lowered.
3. Useful Setting Menus
270
System setup
Item
Description
Item
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match the
paper settings.
Auto Continue
• 0 Sec: This option allows you to continue printing
when the paper size you have set is mismatched with
the paper in the tray.
Auto Tray Switch
• 30 Sec: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message
will display. The machine waits for about 30 second,
then automatically clear the message and continue
printing.
Optimize print quality according to the machine’s
altitude.
Humidity
Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the
environment.
Auto CR
Firmware Version
Determine whether or not the machine continues
printing when it detects the paper does not match. For
example, if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same
size paper, the machine automatically prints from tray 2
after the tray 1 runs out of paper.
This option does not appear if you selected Auto
for Paper Source from printer driver.
• Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits
until you insert the correct paper.
Altitude
Adjustment
Description
Paper Substitution
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s paper size
to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4.
For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set
the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine
prints on A4 paper and vice versa.
Skip Blank Pages
The printer detects the printing data from computer
whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or
skip the blank page.
Allows you to append the required carriage return to
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.
Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature.
Shows the product’s firmware version.
If you set tray 1 to On, for example, then tray 1 is
excluded during tray switching.
Tray Protection
This setting works for copy or print jobs: It
doesn't affect fax jobs.
3. Useful Setting Menus
271
System setup
Item
Description
Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as
a PDF file.
Item
CLR Empty Msg
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
Troubleshooting
Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an
error.
• Standard: Saves the data as a regular PDF.
• PDF/A: Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary
information to render itself in any environment.
Allows you to save print resources and enables ecofriendly printing.
PDF Type
PDF/A file must be self-contained: it cannot rely
on another application to render fonts, open
hyperlinks, or execute scripts, audio files, or video
files.
• Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode
on or off.
Eco Settings
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with
password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode
on/off, the user needs to enter the password.
You can apply the stamp feature.
Stamp
Description
• Item: Prints the time and date, IP address, page
number, device information, or user ID, to the copy
output.
• Select Template: Selects the eco template set from
the SyncThru™ Web Service.
• Opacity: You can select the transparency.
You can reduce the amount of water vapor produced
during printing.
• Position: Sets the position.
Address Book
Views or prints the phone book or email address list.
Import Setting
Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the
machine.
Export Setting
Exports data stored on the machine stick to a USB
memory.
Vapor Mode
• Off: Disables vapor mode.
• On: Enables vapor mode.
• Auto: Automatically enters vapor mode according to
time in high humidity environments.
3. Useful Setting Menus
272
System setup
Item
Description
Turns power off automatically when the machine has
been in power save mode for the length of time set in
Auto Power Off > On > Timeout.
Item
• Auto Color Reg.
• Auto Color
Registration
Description
The machine virtually prints certain patterned image to
calibrate the color printing position. This feature
enhances the colored image sharper and clearer, which
means the machine prints the colored image on the
paper more like the one in the monitor.
• To turn the machine on again, press the
(Power/Wake up) button on the control panel
(make sure the main power switch is on).
Auto Power Off
•
If you run the printer driver or Samsung Easy
Printer Manager, the time automatically
extends.
• While the machine is connected to the
network or working on a print job, Auto
Power Off feature doesn't work.
• Image
Management
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
• Image Mgr.
Custom Color
This menu allows you to adjust contrast, color by color.
• Default: Optimizes colors automatically.
• Print Density: Allows you to manually adjust the color
density for print. Adjust the print density.
If you have moved the machine, it is strongly
recommended to operate this menu manually.
Tone Adjustment
• Default: The machine automatically calibrates the
toner density of machine for the best possible color
print quality. If you select Off, the machine is calibrated
by the factory default toner density.
• Auto Tone Adjustment (Auto Tone Adj.): Allows you
to automatically adjust tone for the best possible print
quality.
• Calibrating ID Sensor (Cal. ID Sensor): Automatically
calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner
or machine parts and uses this information to adjust
the color density. For example, if the yellow toner is
running out, the machine calculates the amount of
remaining yellow toner and adjusts color density so
the printouts are fine.
It is recommended to use the Default setting for best
color quality.
3. Useful Setting Menus
273
System setup
10
Item
Paper setup
Description
• Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
• Duplex Margin: Sets the margin for double-sided
printing.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Common Margin
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel.
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Paper Setup on the touch
screen.
• Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
• Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Sets the paper margins for emulation print page.
Emulation Margin
Item
Paper Size
Description
Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.
Paper Source
Selects from which tray the paper is used.
Margin
Sets the margins for the document.
• Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
• Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,
according to your requirements.
Paper Type
• Binding: When printing on both sides of the paper,
side A's margin closest to the binding will be the same
as side B's margin closest to the binding. Likewise, the
sides' margins farthest from the binding will be the
same.
Sets the paper margins in multi-purpose tray.
• Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
MP Tray
• Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
• Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
• Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
Manual Feeder
Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray.
3. Useful Setting Menus
274
System setup
11
Item
Tray Confirm
Description
Sound / Volume
Activates the tray confirmation message. If you open and
close a tray, a window asking you whether to set the
paper size and type for the tray just opened appears.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Sets the paper margins for the paper trays.
• Simplex Margin: Sets the margin for one-sided
printing.
<Tray X>
• Duplex Margin: Sets the margins for double-sided
printing.
To change the menu options:
• Top Margin: Sets the top margin.
•
Press
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Initial Setup > Sound/Volume
on the touch screen.
• Left Margin: Sets the left margin.
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound on the control panel.
Item
Description
Key Sound
Turns the key sound on or off. A tone sounds each time a
key is pressed if this option is on.
Alarm Sound
Turns the alarm sound on or off. An alarm tone sounds
when an error occurs or fax communication ends if this
option is on.
3. Useful Setting Menus
275
System setup
12
Item
Description
Report
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line
through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone.
With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker
is on until the remote machine answers.
Speaker Volume
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook
Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only
when the telephone line is connected.
To change the menu options:
a Press
•
Press
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup> Next > Reports on the touch screen.
(fax) on the control panel.
b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from
the speaker.
c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you
want.
d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and
return to ready mode.
(Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel.
Item
Description
Configuration
Prints a report on the machine's overall
configuration.
• Supplies Info.
Prints supplies’ information page.
Dial Tone volume
Adjusts the dial tone volume. You can select different
levels.
• Supplies Information
Ring Volume
Adjusts the ring volume. You can select different levels.
Address Book
Prints all of the email addresses currently stored
in the machine’s memory.
Demo Page
Prints the demo page to check whether your
machine is printing properly or not.
Fax Send Confirmation
Prints fax confirmation result.
3. Useful Setting Menus
276
System setup
13
Item
Description
Fax Sent
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
sent.
Fax Received
Prints information on the faxes you have recently
received.
Email Sent
Prints information on the emails you have
recently sent.
• Fax Scheduled Jobs
• Fax Schedule Jobs
Prints the document list currently stored for
delayed faxes along with the starting time and
type of each operation.
Network Configuration
Prints information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
PCL Font List
Prints the PCL font list.
PS Font List
Prints the PS/PS3 font list.
Usage Counter
Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the
total number of pages printed.
Fax Options
Prints the information of a fax reports.
Account
This is only available when Job Accounting is
enabled from the SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service. You can print a report of printout counts
for each user.
Maintenance
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
•
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel.
Item
Description
CLR Empty Msg.
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You
can clear the empty message.
Supplies Life
Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the
supplies life" on page 107.)
Image Mar.
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color
registration, color density, etc.
TonerLow Alert
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty
(see "Setting the toner low alert" on page 108).
Serial Number
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you call for
service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you
can find this.
3. Useful Setting Menus
277
System setup
14
Item
Description
Paper Stacking
If you use a machine in a humid area, or you are using the
damp print media caused by a high humidity, the printouts on the output tray may be curled and may not be
stacked properly. In this case, you can set the machine to
use this function to let print-outs be stacked firmly. But,
using this function will make the print speed slow.
Ram Disk
Enables/disables Ram disk to manage jobs.
Job manage
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
•
Press
Item
(Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage on the control panel.
Description
Active Job
Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed.
Stored Job
Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk.
Secured Job
Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk.
3. Useful Setting Menus
278
System setup
15
16
Address book setup
Document box
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
•
Press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book on the touch screen.
Option
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Press Document Box > Next > select the menu item you want on the touch
screen.
Description
PhoneBook
Adds, views, prints or deletes the phone book list. You
also can create a group.
Email
Adds, views, prints or deletes the email list. You also can
create a group.
• Stored Print: Prints out the stored data without
entering password.
Print
Prints the address book.
• Secured Print: Prints out the stored data with
entering password.
Reset
Resets the current address book.
Option
System Boxes
Shared Folder
Description
Stores the printing data or prints the secure page.
Show the shared folders on your network and save your
jobs there.
3. Useful Setting Menus
279
System setup
17
Network setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Option
Description
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment (see
"Setting IP address" on page 181).
TCP/IP (IPv4)
There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are
not sure, leave as is, or consult the network
administrator.
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the
Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Settings >
Network Settings (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
TCP/IP (IPv6)
Selects this option to use the network environment
through IPv6 (see "IPv6 configuration" on page 192).
Configure the network transmission speed.
•
Press
(Menu)> System Setup> Network on the control panel,
•
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Network Setup on the touch
screen.
Ethernet Speed
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
802.1x
You can selects the user authentication for network
communication. For detailed information consult the
network administrator.
Wireless
Selects this option to use the wireless network.
3. Useful Setting Menus
280
System setup
Option
Description
Option
You can configure the WINS server. WINS(Windows
Internet Name Service) is used in the Windows operating
system.
Reverts the network settings to the default values.
Clear Settings
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Description
WINS
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
Network
Configuration
This list shows information on your machine’s network
connection and configuration.
• Net. Activate
You can set whether to use Ethernet on or off.
SNMP V1/V2
You can set SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol). Administrator’s can use SNMP to monitor and
manage machines on the network.
SNTP
You can set SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
settings. SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the computer
systems through the Internet (NTP) so there would not be
a time difference when exchanging data.
• Ethernet Activate
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
You can set whether to use SyncThru™ Web Service or
not.
Http Activate
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
You can set UPNP protocol.
UPnP(SSDP)
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
MDNS
You can set mDNS (Multicast Domain Name System)
settings.
SetIP
You can set SetIP settings.
3. Useful Setting Menus
281
System setup
Option
Description
You can configure SLP (Service Location Protocol)
settings. This protocol allows host applications to find
services in a local area network without prior
configuration.
SLP
Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.
3. Useful Setting Menus
282
Admin setup
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
Press Setup > Admin Setup > Next on the touch screen.
Item
Description
You can control user access to a machine. You can assign
different levels of permissions to use the machine to each
user.
User Access
Control
You can also use this feature from the SyncThru™
Web Service. Open the Web browser from your
networked computer and type the IP address of your
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click
the Security tab > User Access Control (see
"Registering authorized users" on page 295).
Change Admin.
Password
Changes the machine’s password for accessing the Admin
Setup.
Firmware
Upgrade
To upgrade the latest firmware, turn this option "On" and
then download the firmware file.
Stamp
Sets the stamp feature to access the Admin Setup menu.
3. Useful Setting Menus
283
Eco
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
•
Press Eco > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item
Eco-On
Description
Select eco mode and change on/off or on-forced
option.
Sets eco-related settings and change default settings.
Settings
• Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the
default mode.
• Feature Configuration: Select the Default mode or
Custom mode.
3. Useful Setting Menus
284
Direct USB
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on
page 36).
To change the menu options:
•
Press Direct USB > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.
Item
Description
Print From
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file
to print.
Scan to USB
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals
and save the scanned image to a USB device.
File Manage
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file
to delete. You can format the USB device.
Show Space
Shows the remaining space.
3. Useful Setting Menus
285
4. Special Features
This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features.
• Altitude adjustment
287
• Storing email address
288
• Entering various characters
290
• Setting up the fax address book
291
• Registering authorized users
295
• Printing features
296
• Scan features
313
• Fax features
322
• Using shared folder features
331
• Using optional device features
332
• The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.
• It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.
Altitude adjustment
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the
height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you
on how to set your machine for the best print quality.
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
•
Normal: 0-1,000 m(3,280 ft)
•
High1: 1,000 m(3,280 ft)-2,000 m(6,561 ft)
•
High2: 2,000 m(6,561 ft)-3,000 m(9,842 ft)
•
High3: 3,000 m(9,842 ft)-4,000 m(13,123 ft)
•
High4: 4,000 m(13,123 ft)-5,000 m(16,404 ft)
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer
Manager program.
•
For Windows and Mac users, you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager
>
(Switch to advanced mode) > Device Settings, see "Device
Settings" on page 347.
• If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via
SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page
340).
• You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine’s
display (see "Machine’s basic settings" on page 47).
4. Special Features
287
Storing email address
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
1
Storing on your machine
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up email
address using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
2
3
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
4
5
If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB or FTP and set
the information.
6
Click Apply.
If you make a group,
1 Click Address Book > Group > Add Group.
2 Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name.
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add
individual(s) after this group is created.
3 Click Apply.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
Click Address Book > Individual > Add.
Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax number.
4. Special Features
288
Storing email address
2
Searching for an email address
Searching sequentially through memory
1
Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > All on the control panel.
Or select Scan to >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > All on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Email >
View List > Individual or Group on the touch screen.
2
Search through the entire memory in index (numerical) order, and select
the name and address you want.
Searching with a particular first letter
1
Select
(scan) >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > ID on the control panel.
Or select Scan to >
(Address Book) > Search&Send > Select an
address group > ID on the control panel.
2
3
Enter the first few letters of the name you want.
Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears.
4. Special Features
289
Entering various characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For
example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email
addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.
3
Entering alphanumeric characters
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to
enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display
shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you
want to enter, see "Keypad letters and numbers" on page 290.
• You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
• To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow
button.
Key
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
1
@/.’1
2
ABCabc2
3
DEFdef3
4
GHIghi4
5
JKLjkl5
6
MNOmno6
7
PQRSpqrs7
8
TUVtuv8
9
WXYZwxyz9
0
&+-,0
*
*%^_~!#$()[]
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
#
4
Keypad letters and numbers
#=|?":{}<>;
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)
• Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its
options or the models.
• Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you
are doing.
4. Special Features
290
Setting up the fax address book
4
5
This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/C145xN/CLX-626xND (see
"Variety feature" on page 10).
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.
Registering a speed dial number
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
• For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the
corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2
seconds.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
3
(Back).
Enter the name you want and press OK.
• For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.
(options) > Add on the touch
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.
number, press
) icon to return to ready
Using speed dial numbers
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
2
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
6
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
Book > View List > Individual >
screen.
Press
mode.
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax,
enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want.
5
1
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
For CLX-419xFW/C145xFW/C186xFW/CLX-626xFW,
1
Press Fax > Speed Dial Send or Group Dial Send > Next on the touch
screen.
2
3
Select the number you want.
Press Send.
4. Special Features
291
Setting up the fax address book
7
Editing speed dial numbers
1
2
3
4
5
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Individual on the touch screen.
3
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s name to put in
the group.
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
4
5
6
7
Select the name and number you want and press OK.
8
Press
mode.
Change the name and press OK.
Change the fax number and press OK.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
8
Registering a group dial number
1
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial
number, press
(Back).
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
Select Yes when Add? appears.
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.
When you have finished, select No when Another No.? appears and
press OK.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next >Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Group>
screen.
2
(options) > Add on the touch
Enter a group dial number and press OK.
4. Special Features
292
Setting up the fax address book
9
10
Editing group dial numbers
1
Select
(fax) >
the control panel.
Searching address book for an entry
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone
Book > View List > Group on the touch screen.
2
3
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears.
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?
appears.
4
5
6
7
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from
A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name
associated with the number.
1
Select ct
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Search & Dial > Speed Dial
or Group Dial on the control panel.
2
3
Enter All or ID and press OK.
Press OK to add or delete the number.
Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter
you want to search.
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,” press the 6 button,
which is labeled with “MNO.”
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.
Select No at the Another No.? and press OK.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
4
Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
) icon to return to ready
4. Special Features
293
Setting up the fax address book
11
Printing address book
You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.
1
Select ct
(fax) >
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Reports > Address Book on
the touch screen.
2
Press OK.
The machine begins printing.
4. Special Features
294
Registering authorized users
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
To send a scanned image, copy image, or fax data through email or via network
server safely, you must register account information of authorized users to your
local machine using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
2
3
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
9
Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-mail
Address, and Fax Number.
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s)
after this group is created.
10
Click Apply.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
4
5
Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication.
6
7
8
Click Apply.
Select Basic Authentication in the Authentication Mode, and select
Local Authentication in the AA Method, and click.
Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window.
Click User Profile > Add.
4. Special Features
295
Printing features
If Printing preferences has a ►, you can select other printer drivers
connected to the selected printer.
• For basic printing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic printing"
on page 65).
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
5
6
12
Change the settings on each tab.
Click OK.
Changing the default print settings
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
3
4
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
Right-click on your machine.
For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, select Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7/8 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
Printing preferences.
4. Special Features
296
Printing features
13
Setting your machine as a default machine
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
•
2
3
4
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Settings.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•
For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
•
For Windows 7/8, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
Select your machine.
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default printer has a
►, you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer.
4. Special Features
297
Printing features
14
Using advanced print features
1
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.
2
3
Click Print.
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.
• See "Features by model" on page 7.
• The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or
higher.
• Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print because the
printer is out of memory.
• For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website, http://
www.samsung.com > find your product> Support or downloads.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.
For example, c:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My
Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are
using.
4. Special Features
298
Printing features
Understanding special printer features
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print
settings. The machine name that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• Select the Help menu or click the
on page 68).
Item
Multiple Pages per
Side
button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"
Description
Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
4. Special Features
299
Printing features
Item
Poster Printing
Description
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets
together to form one poster-size document.
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab
to make it easier to paste the sheets together.
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce
a booklet.
Booklet Printinga
• If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
8
9
• The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what
paper sizes are available.
• If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without
mark).
• Double-sided
Printing
• Double-sided
Printing (Manual)a
or
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.
• You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper
• If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of
the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.
• Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the Double-sided Printing (Manual) option.
4. Special Features
300
Printing features
Item
Description
• Double-sided
Printing
• Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine.
• Double-sided
• Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.
Printing (Manual)a
• None: Disables this feature.
• Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
• Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing. This option is not available when you
use Double-sided Printing (Manual).
Paper Options
Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the
document.
Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
4. Special Features
301
Printing features
Item
Watermark
(Creating a
watermark)
Watermark
(Editing a watermark)
Watermark
(Deleting a
watermark)
Description
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.
a
b
c
d
e
To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.
Click Update to save the changes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
a
b
c
d
To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.
Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 8).
Overlaya
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document.
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
• The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
• The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
4. Special Features
302
Printing features
Item
Overlaya
(Creating a new page
overlay)
Description
a
b
c
d
To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.
Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is
C:\Formover).
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.
a Click the Advanced tab.
b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you
want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window.
Overlaya
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay
(Using a page overlay)
List box.
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a
document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Overlaya
(Deleting a page
overlay)
a
b
c
d
e
f
In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
Select Edit in the Text drop down list.
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
Click Delete.
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
4. Special Features
303
Printing features
Item
Description
•
This feature is available only if you have installed the mass device or optional memory (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• You need to check Storage Options to use this feature (see "Setting Device Options" on page 103).
• Without installing the mass storage device in the machine, the Ram Disk feature provides only 3 options: Normal, Proof, and
Confidential.
• Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory.
- Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.
- Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.
- Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.
Print Modeb
- Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing.
- Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.
- Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the
mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue, decreasing the computer’s work load.
- Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.
• Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel.
• User ID: This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel. The user name automatically appears as the
user name that you use to log on Windows.
• Enter Password: If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured, you have to enter the password for the document
box. This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel.
• Confirm Password: Re-enter the password to confirm it.
4. Special Features
304
Printing features
Item
Job Accounting
Description
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
• User permission: If you check this option, only users with user permission can start a print job.
• Group permission: If you check this option, only groups with group permission can start a print job.
• Click the question mark(
) from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about.
• Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru™ Web Service.
Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects the printing information even though the data is snatched on
a network.
Job Encryptionc
Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the mass storage device is installed. The mass storage device is used to decrypt the printing
data (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.
b. CLX-626x series only.
c. CLX-626xFW only.
4. Special Features
305
Printing features
• Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
15
Using Direct Printing Utility
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below.
For higher versions, you must open the file to print it.
• Available for Windows OS users only.
•
Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or
optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Printing
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.
What is Direct Printing Utility?
1
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your
machine to print without having to open the file.
To install this program:
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
• Optional memory or mass storage device should be installed on your
machine, to print files using this program. (see "Variety feature" on page
10).
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing
restriction feature and retry printing.
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Direct Printing Utility .
The Direct Printing Utility window appears.
2
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click
Browse.
3
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.
The file is added in the Select Files section.
4
5
Customize the machine settings for your needs.
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate
the password feature, and retry printing.
4. Special Features
306
Printing features
Using the right-click menu
16
Mac printing
1
Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing.
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.
2
3
4
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Select the machine to use.
Customize the machine settings.
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.
Printing a document
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer driver settings in each
application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Mac:
1
2
Open the document to print.
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.
4
5
6
Open the File menu and click Print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some
applications).
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
Click Print.
4. Special Features
307
Printing features
Changing printer settings
Printing on both sides of the paper
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page
10).
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties
window is similar to the following.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.
1
2
3
4
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print
on one sheet of paper.
Select the other options to use.
Click Print.
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet
of paper.
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:
•
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
•
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
1
2
3
4
5
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.
Select the other options to use.
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper
when you are printing more than 1 copy.
4. Special Features
308
Printing features
Using help
17
Linux printing
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported.
Printing from applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such
application.
1
2
Open the document to print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Print Setup for some
applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, and make
sure that your machine is selected. Click Apply.
4
5
6
Open the File menu and click Print.
Select your machine to print.
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.
4. Special Features
309
Printing features
7
8
Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.
Configuring Printer Properties
Click Print.
You can change the default printing options or connection type with Printing
utility supplied by the OS.
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Printing files
You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard
CUPS directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows
you to do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
1
Launch Printing utility(Go to System > Administration > Printing
menu or execute "system-config-printer" command in Terminal
program).
2
3
4
Select your printer and double-click it.
Change default printing options or connection type.
Click Apply button.
"lp -d <printer name> -o <option> <file name>"
Please refer to lp or lpr man page on your system for more details.
4. Special Features
310
Printing features
18
Unix printing
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,
press Properties.
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by model" on
page 7).
5
Press OK to start the print job.
Changing the machine settings
Proceeding the print job
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various
print options in printer Properties.
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, or PS files to print.
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,
and “C” for Cancel.
1
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.
For example, if you are printing “document1”
General tab
printui document1
•
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according
to your requirements.
•
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.
•
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto
Selection.
•
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.
•
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
user can select various print options.
2
3
4
Select a printer that has been already added.
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.
4. Special Features
311
Printing features
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other
applications for odd-even printing.
•
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.
•
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,
Double-line hairline)
Image tab
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your
document.
Text tab
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.
Margins tab
•
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size
selected.
•
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.
Printer-Specific Settings tab
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.
4. Special Features
312
Scan features
•
TWAIN: TWAIN is one of the a preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection (see "Scanning from image editing program" on page
318).
•
Samsung Easy Document Creator: You can use this program to scan
images or documents. We recommend using scan features with the
Samsung Easy Document Creator program provided in the supplied
sofware CD.
• For basic scanning features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic scanning"
on page 77).
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus, depending
on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan
at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.
•
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your
computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable
(see "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 318).
•
USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto
an USB memory device.
•
Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See
"Scanning to email" on page 315).
•
FTP/SMB: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP/SMB server (see
"Scanning to FTP/SMB server" on page 317).
19
Basic scanning method
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Variety feature" on page 10).
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network.
The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:
•
See "Using Samsung Easy Document Creator" on page 344.
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned
data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see
"Basic Scanning" on page 77).
4. Special Features
313
Scan features
20
21
Setting the scan settings in the computer
Scanning from network connected machine
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager (see "Using Samsung Easy
Printer Manager" on page 345).
2
3
4
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
Select Scan to PC Settings menu.
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD,
since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver
locally" on page 32).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select
Select the option you want.
•
•
•
5
This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the
network interface (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on
the device.
(Scan) > Scan To PC > Network PC on the control panel.
Or select Scan > Network PC on the touch screen.
Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device
settings.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Press Save > OK.
3
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if
necessary.
4. Special Features
314
Scan features
22
• ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer
Manager >
Scanning to email
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC Settings.
• Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy
Printer Manager >
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC
Settings.
4
5
Select the option you want and press OK.
Setting up an email account
Scanning begins.
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating
system or the application you are using.
2
3
4
5
Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).
6
7
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
Press Apply.
4. Special Features
315
Scan features
• If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a
check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication.
• Enter the IP address and port number.
7
8
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.
Scanning and sending an email
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
Select
(scan) > Scan To Email on the control panel.
Or select Scan > Send Email on the touch screen.
3
Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru™ Web
Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 340).
4
Enter the sender’s and recipient’s email address.
You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self
option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on SyncThru™ Web Service.
5
6
Enter an email subject and press OK.
Select the file format to scan, and press OK.
4. Special Features
316
Scan features
23
Scanning to FTP/SMB server
9
Enter the path for saving the scanned image.
• The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.
• The folder properties need to be setup as a share.
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
• Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder.
10
Press Apply.
Setting up an FTP/SMB server
Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server
1
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"
on page 340).
2
3
4
5
6
Select Address Book > Individual > Add.
7
8
Enter the login name and password.
1
2
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
3
Select
Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB.
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access
of unauthorized people.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
(scan) > Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP on the control panel.
Or select Scan > SMB or FTP on the touch screen.
4
5
Select a server and scan format you want.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the
specified server.
Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain,
otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB
server.
4. Special Features
317
Scan features
24
25
Scanning from image editing program
You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as
Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below
to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
4
5
6
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.
Scanning using the WIA driver
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft
Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using
additional software:
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
3
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and
Printers.
4
5
6
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan.
7
Scan and save your scanned image.
Set the scan options.
Scan and save your scanned image.
New Scan application appears.
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your
preferences affect the picture.
4. Special Features
318
Scan features
26
Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format.
6
Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview
image.
7
8
Select to Save to Location, Send to E-mail, or Send to SNS.
Click on Save (Saving a Scan), Send ( E-mailing a Scan), or Share
(Uploading).
• Availabe for Windows OS users only.
• Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator.
If there is room on the document glass, more than one item can be scanned
• Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you
install the machine software (see "Using Samsung Easy Document
Creator" on page 344).
at the same time. Use the
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
3
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs.
Click Samsung Printers, and start Samsung Easy Document Creator.
Click Scan (
4
5
tool to make multiple selection areas.
) from the home screen.
Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start.
Make adjustments to the image (Scan Settings and More Options).
4. Special Features
319
Scan features
Scanning from network connected machine
27
Mac scanning
Network or wireless model only (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Scanning from USB connected machine
1
2
3
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
4
5
1
2
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
3
4
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
According to OS, follow steps below.
•
Select the option you want.
For 10.4
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
-
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use
TWAIN software checkbox is checked.
-
Click Connect.
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port,
or If TWAIN UI appears, click Change Port.. from the Preference
tab and select a new port.
Scan and save your scanned image.
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest
version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
•
For 10.5
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.
-
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your
machine in Bonjour Devices.
4. Special Features
320
Scan features
•
5
6
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps
above.
28
Linux scanning
For 10.6 -10.9, select your device below SHARED.
Set the scan options on this program.
Scan and save your scanned image.
• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the
latest version. Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10.4.7 or
higher.
• For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple-scan(If it's not
installed, please install it manually to use scan features. For example, you
may use "yum install xsane" for rpm package systems and "apt-get install
xsane" for deb package systems to install xsane).
3
4
Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply.
Click the Scan button.
• You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software. Open the
Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Scan Assistant.
4. Special Features
321
Fax features
30
• For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on
page 78).
Redialing the fax number
• This function is not supported for CLX-419xN/C145xN/CLX-626xND (see
"Control panel overview" on page 26).
1
2
Press
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel.
Select the fax number you want.
Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.
29
Automatic redialing
3
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send
a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on
the country's factory default setting.
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine
automatically begins to send.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No when Another Page? appears.
(Start) button to redial the
31
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press
(Stop or
Stop/Clear) button.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts.
1
2
3
Press
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control
Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want.
Confirming a transmission
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears
on the display. If you receive an error message, press
(Stop or Stop/Clear)
to clear the message and try to send the fax again.
Select the option you want.
4. Special Features
322
Fax features
5
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed. Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup
> Sending > Fax Confirmation on the control panel.
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window and click on
any option you want to know about.
6
32
Sending a fax in the computer
Click Send.
33
Delaying a fax transmission
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer
driver.
1
2
Open the document to be sent.
Select Print from the File menu.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
3
4
Press
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
3
4
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
Click Print or OK.
(fax) on the control panel.
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.
Press
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel.
Or select Fax > Delayed Send on the touch screen.
5
6
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
4. Special Features
323
Fax features
7
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat
steps 5.
Canceling a reserved fax job
• You can add up to 10 destinations.
• Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group
dial numbers anymore.
8
Enter the job name and the time.
1
Press
panel.
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control
2
3
Select the fax job you want and press OK.
Press OK when Yes highlights.
The selected fax is deleted from memory.
4
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time
on the following day.
Press
(Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.
34
9
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.
Press
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Fax Scheduled Jobs on the
control panel.
• When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server and
IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web
Service" on page 340).
• Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in
grayscale.
4. Special Features
324
Fax features
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Send Forward > Forward
to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Send Forward
> Forward to Fax, Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch
screen.
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale.
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive
Forward > Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or
Forward to Server on the touch screen.
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
3
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
4
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Forward to Fax, Forward to PC , Forward to Email or Forward to
Server on the control panel.
• Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional
goods (see "Variety feature" on page 10).
• To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward&Print.
) icon to return to ready
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
35
Forwarding a received fax
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,
this feature may be useful.
2
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and
press OK.
3
4
Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
4. Special Features
325
Fax features
36
37
Sending faxes on both sides of paper
Receiving a fax in the computer
• This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
• To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
Press
(fax) > Fax Feature > Duplex on the control panel.
Or select Fax > Select the menu you want > Select Duplex from the submenus > on the touch screen.
•
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one isde only.
•
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
•
2 Sided Rotated: For originals that are printed on both sides, but the
back is rotated 180°.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotated, load the originals on the DADF. If the
machine cannot detect the original on the DADF, it automatically changes
the option to 1 Sided.
3
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Receive Forward >
Forward to PC > Forward the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Receive
Forward > Forward to PC > Forward on the touch screen.
1
2
3
4
Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.
Select Fax to PC Settings menu.
Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings.
•
Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.
•
Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes.
•
Prefix: Select prefix.
•
Print received fax: Set to print information for the received fax after
receiving the fax.
Press OK.
4. Special Features
326
Fax features
5
•
Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to
notify receiving a fax.
•
Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with
default application.
•
None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or
opens the application.
•
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine.
Press Save > OK.
•
38
Changing the receive modes
1
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode
on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax
Default > Common > Receive Mode on the touch screen.
2
Select the option you want.
•
•
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
reception mode.
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine is attached to your
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to
Fax mode to receive the fax.
DRPD: You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 328.
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
3
4
Press OK.
Press
mode.
(Stop/Clear) button or home(
) icon to return to ready
(On Hook Dial) and then
(Start) button.
4. Special Features
327
Fax features
39
41
Receiving manually in Tel mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing
pressing
(On Hook Dial) button and then
(Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset,
you can answer calls using the handset (see "Features by model" on page 7).
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you
can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone,
without going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the
keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
40
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
want.
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on
the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine
stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine
is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket,
your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined
number of rings.
• If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
• If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering
machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy
and scan features are not available.
42
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
This setting may not be available depending on your country. Distinctive Ring is
a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone
line to answer several different telephone numbers. This feature is often used by
answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need
to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.
4. Special Features
328
Fax features
43
This setting may not be available depending on your country.
1
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive
Mode > DRPD on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax
Default > Common > Receive Mode > DRPD on the touch screen.
2
3
Receiving in secure receiving mode
Call your fax number from another telephone.
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes
go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes by entering the password.
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern.
To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > On on the control panel.
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.
4
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive on
the touch screen.
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.
• DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect
the machine to another telephone line.
• After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the
machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
Printing received faxes
1
Select
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print
on the control panel.
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive
> Print on the touch screen.
2
3
Enter a four-digit password and press OK.
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
4. Special Features
329
Fax features
•
44
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper
2
• Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
3
5
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
1
3
4
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
Press OK.
Press
(Stop/Clear)button to return to ready mode.
45
2
Press
(fax) >
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print
on the control panel.
•
Off: Prints in Normal mode.
•
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing,
your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be
processed at the same time.
4. Special Features
330
Using shared folder features
This feature allows you to use the machine’s memory as a shared folder. The
advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder
through your computer’s window.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Features by model" on page 7).
• You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device
(see "Variety feature" on page 10).
47
Using the shared folder
You can use the shared folder exactly like the normal computer. Create, edit and
delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You also store the scanned
data in the shared folder. You can directly print files stored on a the shared
folder. You can print TIFF, JPEG and PRN files.
• The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user’ s
access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users.
46
Creating a shared folder
1
2
Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.
3
Create a new folder under nfsroot directory.
Enter the printer’s \\[ip address] (example: \\169.254.133.42) in
the address field, and press the Enter key or click Go.
4. Special Features
331
Using optional device features
• CLX-626x series only.
3
Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list.
4
5
6
Click Properties or Preferences .
7
Select OK.
• Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page
10).
48
From the printer driver
If you install the optional device, you can use advanced printing features, such
as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window. Check the mass
storage or RAM disk option in Device Options, then you can select the various
features from Print Mode (see "Setting Device Options" on page 103).
1
2
Open the document you want to print.
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
Click the each tab then select Print Mode.
Select the option you want (see "Understanding special printer features"
on page 299).
4. Special Features
332
Using optional device features
49
From the control panel
If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you can use
these features from the
(Menu) button> System Setup > Job Manage..
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
•
Active Job: All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active
job queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.
•
Secured Job: You can print or delete a secured job. Shows the list of secured
jobs the user has set in the printer driver. You need to enter the user name
and password set in the printer driver.
•
Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job.
•
File Policy: You can choose the file policy for generating file name before
you proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory
already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can
rename or overwrite it.
4. Special Features
333
5. Useful Management
Tools
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
• Accessing management tools
335
• Easy Capture Manager
336
• Samsung Easy Color Manager
337
• Samsung AnyWeb Print
338
• Easy Eco Driver
339
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service
340
• Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
344
• Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
345
• Using Samsung Printer Status
348
• Using Samsung Printer Experience
350
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers.
1
2
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
•
3
4
5
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers.
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
Click the management tool you want to use.
• After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start menu > Programs or All Programs.
• For Windows 8, after installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
5. Useful Management Tools
335
Easy Capture Manager
• Available for Windows OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited.
5. Useful Management Tools
336
Samsung Easy Color Manager
Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties, such as brightness, contrast, and saturation. Color tone change
can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine.
• Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
5. Useful Management Tools
337
Samsung AnyWeb Print
• Available for Windows OS users only.
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program.
Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it: (http://www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or Downloads).
5. Useful Management Tools
338
Easy Eco Driver
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 8).
• Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing. To use this application, Printer Properties > Basic tab > Start Easy Eco
Driver before printing job checkbox should be checked.
If you did not check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the printer properties but want to use Easy Eco Driver, select Eco Printing Preview in
the Favorites tab each time you print.
Easy Eco Driver also allows you to do simple editing such as removing images and texts and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.
How to use:
1 Open a document to print.
2 Print the document.
A preview window appears.
3 Select the options you want to apply to the document.
You can see the preview of the applied features.
4 Click Print.
5. Useful Management Tools
339
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
•
ID: admin
•
Password: sec00000
• SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide may differ from
your machine depending on its options or models.
• Network model only (see "Software" on page 8).
1
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service
1
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but
you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab.
1
2
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login. We recommend you to
change the default password for security reasons.
5. Useful Management Tools
340
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Settings tab
2
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
•
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.
•
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets
options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Security tab
Information tab
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check
things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an
error report.
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to
log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
•
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information and also
enables or disables machine features.
•
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their
severity.
•
Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x,
and Authentication servers.
•
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in
the cartridge.
•
•
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and
duplex.
User Access Control: Classifies users into several groups according to each
user’s role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be
controlled by the group’s role definition.
•
System Log: The System Log contains settings related to logs of device
events.
•
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s information.
•
Security Information: Shows the machine’s security information.
•
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail
address, and font reports.
5. Useful Management Tools
341
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
3
CLX-626xFW only.
-
Log Configuration: The Log Configuration section contains settings
related to saving logs.
-
Log Viewer: The Log Viewer section contains options to view logs
stored locally on the device.
E-mail notification setup
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By
setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP
server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine
error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be
used more frequently by a machine administrator.
Maintenance tab
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.
•
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.
•
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.
•
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check
information.
•
License Management: License Management provides settings for installed
applications and application licenses.
•
Cloning: You can import or export (transfer) various settings (machine
setting, network information, address book, etc.) between devices that have
the Cloning feature in SyncThru™ Web Service.
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
3
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification.
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network
environment before setting e-mail notification.
5. Useful Management Tools
342
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
4
5
Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification.
Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items
you want to receive an alert for.
6
4
Setting the system administrator’s information
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.
Click Apply.
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that
case, contact a network administrator.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field
and press the Enter key or click Go.
2
3
4
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
5
Click Apply.
From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email
address.
5. Useful Management Tools
343
Using Samsung Easy Document Creator
Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan, compile,
and save documents in multiple formats, including .epub format. These
documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax. Whether you’re a
student needing to organize research from the library or a stay-at-home mom
sharing scanned pictures from last year’s birthday party, Samsung Easy
Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools.
The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features below:
•
Image Scanning: Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures.
•
Document Scanning: Use for scanning documents with text or text and
images.
•
Text Converting: Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an
editable text format.
•
Book Scanning: Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner.
•
SNS Upload: Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or
existing images to a variety of social networking sites (SNS).
•
E-Book Conversion: Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as
one e-book or convert existing files into an e-book format.
•
Plug-in: Scan, fax, and convert to E-Book directly from the Microsoft Office
program.
Click the Help ( ) button from the window and click on any option you
want to know about.
5. Useful Management Tools
344
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
• This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
(see "Software" on page 8).
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic
sections as described in the table that follows:
• Available for Windows and Mac OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are
using.
• For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.
5
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.
Printer list
1
The Printer List displays printers installed on your
computer and network printers added by network
discovery (Windows only).
For Mac,
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer
Manager.
5. Useful Management Tools
345
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Printer
information
2
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the machine’s
model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine
status.
Application
information
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings
(switching UI), refresh, preference setting, summary, help,
and about.
The
button is used to change the user
interface to the advanced settings user interface
(see "Advanced settings user interface overview"
on page 347).
Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This
section also includes links to applications in the advanced
settings.
4
If you connect your machine to a network, the
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.
You can view the online User’s Guide.
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs.
You can directly open the necessary section in the
user’s guide.
3
Quick links
Contents area
Displays information about the selected machine,
remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary
based on the machine selected. Some machines do not
have this feature.
Order supplies
Click on the Order button from the supply ordering
window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)
from online.
5
6
Select the Help menu or click the
button from the window and click on
any option you want to know about.
5. Useful Management Tools
346
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager
Fax to PC Settings
6
Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible
for managing the network and machines.
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected
device.
•
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.
•
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and
allows more options to be set.
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Alert Settings (Windows only)
Device Settings
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,
layout, emulation, network, and print information.
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
•
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.
•
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.
•
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.
Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
•
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the
device.
•
Basic tab: Contains general scan and device settings.
•
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.
Job Accounting
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.
5. Useful Management Tools
347
Using Samsung Printer Status
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the
machine status.
Icon
• The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
Mean
Normal
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no
errors or warnings.
Warning
The machine is in a state where an error might occur in
the future. For example, it might be in toner low status,
which may lead to toner empty status.
Error
The machine has at least one error.
• Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine
(see "Specifications" on page 144).
• Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 8).
Description
7
Samsung Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install
the machine software.
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:
Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in each
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
Option
You can set printing job alert related settings.
1
2
5. Useful Management Tools
348
Using Samsung Printer Status
3
Order Supplies
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
User’s Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide.
This button opens the Troubleshooting
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
4
5
Close
Close the window.
5. Useful Management Tools
349
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s web site, and check connected machine information. This
application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the
machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
1
8
2
6
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
3
To open the application,
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience (
4
) tile.
5
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
described in the following table:
1
Printer
Information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.
5. Useful Management Tools
350
Using Samsung Printer Experience
9
2
User Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
3
4
Order
Supplies
Visit Samsung
Printer Settings
5
Device List &
Latest Scanned
Image
6
Click on this button to order replacement toner
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
You can configure various machine settings such as
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking,
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via
USB cable.
The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung
Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the
latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network to scan from here.
This section is for the users with multi-functional
printers.
Adding a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
Select Add Printer
Select the printer you want to add.
You can see the added printer.
If you see
mark, you can also click
mark to add printers.
5. Useful Management Tools
351
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Deleting a printer
10
Printing from Windows 8
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
4
Select Remove Printer
Select the printer you want to delete.
Click Yes.
You can see that the deleted printer is removed from the screen.
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing
1
2
3
4
Open the document to print.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
5. Useful Management Tools
352
Using Samsung Printer Experience
5
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Cancelling a print job
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
•
) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
the control panel.
(Stop/Clear) button on
Opening more settings
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or
options.
You can set up more printing parameters.
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to print.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
Click More settings.
5. Useful Management Tools
353
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Basic
Paper settings
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Eco settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Layout settings
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
5. Useful Management Tools
354
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Security tab
11
Scanning from Windows 8
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that these features are not
supported.
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder.
2
3
4
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
5
6
Click Prescan (
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.
Click Scan (
).
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
resolution.
)to check the image.
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
5. Useful Management Tools
355
Using Samsung Printer Experience
7
Click Scan (
)and save the image.
• When you place the originals in the ADF (or DADF), Prescan (
available.
) is not
• You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
5. Useful Management Tools
356
6. Troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
• Paper feeding problems
358
• Power and cable connecting problems
359
• Printing problems
360
• Printing quality problems
364
• Copying problems
372
• Scanning problems
373
• Faxing problems
375
• Operating system problems
377
For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings, refer to the
troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter (see "Troubleshooting for wireless
network" on page 234).
Paper feeding problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Paper jams during printing.
Clear the paper jam.
Paper sticks together.
• Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
• Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.
Paper does not feed into the machine.
• Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
The paper keeps jamming.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the
manual feeding in tray.
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.
Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.
6. Troubleshooting
358
Power and cable connecting problems
Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems.
Condition
The machine is not receiving power,
or the connection cable between the
computer and the machine is not
connected properly.
Suggested solutions
• Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power/Wake Up) button on the control,
press it.
• Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.
6. Troubleshooting
359
Printing problems
Condition
The machine does not
print.
Possible cause
The machine is not receiving power.
Suggested solutions
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a
(Power/
Wake Up) button on the control, press it.
The machine is not selected as the default
machine.
Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
• The cover is not closed. Close the cover.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (see "Clearing paper jams" on page 123).
• No paper is loaded. Load paper (see "Loading paper in the tray" on page 50).
• The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
• Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.
The connection cable between the computer and
the machine is not connected properly.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 25).
The connection cable between the computer and
the machine is defective.
If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job.
You can also try using a different machine cable.
The port setting is incorrect.
Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to
the correct one.
6. Troubleshooting
360
Printing problems
Condition
The machine does not
print.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine may be configured incorrectly.
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.
Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.
The machine is malfunctioning.
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a service representative.
The document size is so big that the hard disk
space of the computer is insufficient to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.
The output tray is full.
Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.
The machine selects print
materials from the wrong
paper source.
The paper option that was selected in the
Printing Preferences may be incorrect.
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab
within the Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on
page 68).
A print job is extremely
slow.
The job may be very complex.
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.
Half the page is blank.
The page orientation setting may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67). See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on page 68).
The paper size and the paper size settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.
The machine cable is loose or defective.
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already
printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer
that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable.
The machine prints, but
the text is wrong,
garbled, or incomplete.
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection
in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on
page 67).
6. Troubleshooting
361
Printing problems
Condition
Pages print, but they are
blank.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The wrong printer driver was selected.
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.
The software application is malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from another application.
The operating system is malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again.
The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.
Redistribute the toner, if necessary.
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.
• See "Redistributing toner" on page 96.
• See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98.
The file may have blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.
Some parts, such as the controller or the board,
may be defective.
Contact a service representative.
The machine does not
print PDF files correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the
Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing options.
The print quality of
photos is not good.
Images are not clear.
The resolution of the photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
Before printing, the
machine emits vapor near
the output tray.
Using damp/wet paper can cause vapor [white
smoke] during printing.
This is not a problem, just keep printing. If you are bothered by the smoke [vapor], then
replace the paper with fresh paper from an unopened ream.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
6. Troubleshooting
362
Printing problems
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine does not
print special-sized paper,
such as billing paper.
Paper size and paper size setting do not match.
Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
The printed billing paper
is curled.
The paper type setting does not match.
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,
and set type to Thin (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
6. Troubleshooting
363
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.
Condition
Light or faded print
Suggested solutions
• If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 98).
• The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn
the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine
(see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
109). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
The top half of the paper is
printed lighter than the rest of
the paper
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
6. Troubleshooting
364
Printing quality problems
Condition
Toner specks
Suggested solutions
• The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
A aB bC c
Dropouts
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening
printing preferences" on page 67).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
White Spots
If white spots appear on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be
dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
• The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
6. Troubleshooting
365
Printing quality problems
Condition
Vertical lines
Suggested solutions
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and
install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page
109). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Black or color background
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:
• Change to a lighter weight paper.
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount
of background shading.
• Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
• Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 96).
Toner smear
• Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
6. Troubleshooting
366
Printing quality problems
Condition
Vertical repetitive defects
Suggested solutions
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after
a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.
Background scatter
A
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams
on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.
Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
• If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application
or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 67). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.
• If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 96).
Toner particles are around bold
characters or pictures
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
• Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging
can occur causing this copy quality problem.
6. Troubleshooting
367
Printing quality problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Misformed characters
• If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.
Page skew
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
A aBb
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C c
Cc
Curl or wave
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
6. Troubleshooting
368
Printing quality problems
Condition
Wrinkles or creases
Suggested solutions
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts are dirty
• Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
Solid color or black pages
• The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
A
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 98).
• The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
6. Troubleshooting
369
Printing quality problems
Condition
Loose toner
Suggested solutions
• Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
• Check the paper type, thickness, and quality.
• Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 98).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.
Character voids
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.
A
Horizontal stripes
• The paper may not meet paper specifications.
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:
• The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 98).
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.
6. Troubleshooting
370
Printing quality problems
Condition
Curl
Suggested solutions
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
• Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see
"Opening printing preferences" on page 67).
• An unknown image
repetitively appears on a few
sheets
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see
"Altitude adjustment" on page 287).
• Loose toner
• Light print or contamination
occurs
6. Troubleshooting
371
Copying problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page
72).
Smears, lines, marks, or spots
appear on copies.
• If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.
Copy image is skewed.
• Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide.
• If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 113).
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 109).
Blank copies print out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.
Image rubs off the copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy paper jams
occur.
• Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge produces fewer
copies than expected before
running out of toner.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
• The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.
• Turn the machine off and back on.
6. Troubleshooting
372
Scanning problems
Condition
The scanner does not work.
Suggested solutions
• Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see
"Loading originals" on page 61).
• There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.
• Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace
the printer cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).
The unit scans very slowly.
• Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how
to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.
6. Troubleshooting
373
Scanning problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Message appears on your
computer screen:
• There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.
• Device can’t be set to the H/W
mode you want.
• The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• Port is being used by another
program.
• Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.
• Port is disabled.
• The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.
• The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.
• Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the
current job is completed, try
again.
• Invalid handle.
• Scanning has failed.
6. Troubleshooting
374
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not working,
there is no display, or the
buttons are not working.
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
No dial tone.
• Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 25).
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.
• Ensure that the power is turned on.
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in memory
do not dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.
The original does not feed into
the machine.
• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick
or thin.
• Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.
• The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative (see "Available maintenance parts" on
page 93).
Faxes are not received
automatically.
• The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 327).
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 147).
• Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.
The machine does not send.
• Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.
• Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank
spaces or is of poor-quality.
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your machine by making a copy.
• A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 98).
6. Troubleshooting
375
Faxing problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Some of the words on an
incoming fax are stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.
There are lines on the originals
you sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 113).
The machine dials a number,
but the connection with the
other fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and
ask them to solve the problem on their side.
Faxes do not store in memory.
There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.
Blank areas appear at the
bottom of each page or on
other pages, with a small strip
of text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.
6. Troubleshooting
376
Operating system problems
1
Common Windows problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
“File in Use” message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or
“Illegal Operation” messages
appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A printer
timeout error occurred”
message appear.
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready
mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.
Samsung Printer Experience is
not shown when you click more
settings.
Samsung Printer Experience is not installed. Download the app from the Windows Store and install it.
Machine information is not
displayed when you click the
device in the Devices and
Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties)
If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.
6. Troubleshooting
377
Operating system problems
2
Common Mac problems
Condition
The machine does not print PDF files
correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or
illustrations are missing.
Suggested solutions
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.
Some letters are not displayed normally
during cover page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on
the cover page.
When printing a document in Mac with
Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors
print incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.
Refer to the Mac User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages.
6. Troubleshooting
378
Operating system problems
3
Common Linux problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
There is no xsane nor simple-scan
application on my Linux machine.
For some Linux distributions, there might be no default scan application. To use scan features, install one of scan applications
using download center supplied by the OS(ex. Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu, Install/Remove Software for openSUSE,
Software for Fedora).
Scanner can not be found via network.
For some Linux distributions, strong firewall is enabled and it may block our installer from opening the necessary port for
searching network devices. In such a case, open the snmp port - 22161 manually or disable the firewall temporarily while
using the device.
When printing more than one copy, the
second copy does not print.
The problem occurs on Ubuntu 12.04 due to the problem in standard CUPS filter 'pdftops'. Update 'cups-filters' package to
version 1.0.18 to fix the problem ('pdftops' is a part of 'cups-filters' package).
Unchecking the collate option in the
Print Dialog does not work.
For some distributions, GNOME Print Dialog has an issue handling the collate option. As workaround, set the default value
of collate option to False using the system's printing utility(execute "system-config-printer" in the Terminal program).
Printing always works with duplex.
This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9.10 CUPS package. Update CUPS version to 1.4.1-5ubuntu2.2.
Printer is not added through system's
printing utility.
The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the defect in 'system-config-printer' package of the Debian 7 (http://
bugs.debian.org/cgi-bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=662813 in Debian bug tracking system). Please use another way to add printer
(CUPS WebUI for example)
Paper size and orientation are disabled
in the Print Dialog when opening text
files.
The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it's related to 'leafpad' text editor on Fedora 19. Please use other text editors like
'gedit'.
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.
6. Troubleshooting
379
Operating system problems
4
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.
Problem
The PostScript file cannot be
printed
Possible cause
The PostScript driver may not be installed
correctly.
Solution
• Install the PostScript driver (see "Software Installation" on page 174).
• Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for
printing.
• If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Limit Check Error report prints
The print job was too complex.
You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.
A PostScript error page prints
The print job may not be PostScript.
Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software
application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.
The optional tray is not
selected in the driver
The printer driver has not been configured to
recognize the optional tray.
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the
tray option (see "Setting Device Options" on page 103).
When printing a document in
Mac with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or
higher, colors print incorrectly
The resolution setting in the printer driver may
not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in
Acrobat Reader.
6. Troubleshooting
380
Quick Guide for Windows 8
User
This chapter will outline features specific to the Windows 8 OS. This chapter applies to users running Windows 8.
• Understanding the screen
382
• System requirements
383
• Installing the driver locally
384
• Installing the driver over the network
386
• Installing the driver over the wireless network
388
• Uninstalling the driver
390
• Using Samsung Printer Experience
391
• Accessing management tools
398
• Installing accessories
399
• Troubleshooting
400
• The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or interface in use.
• Since this guide has been prepared based on Windows 8, some of the instructions may differ
depending on the version. It may also be modified without prior notice.
Understanding the screen
Windows 8 provides both the new Start screen mode and the Desktop screen mode of the existing OS.
Start Screen
Desktop Screen
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
382
System requirements
Requirement (recommended)
Operating
system
Windows® 8
CPU
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit
or 64-bit processor or higher
RAM
1 GB (2 GB)
Free HDD
Space
16 GB
• Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to
enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
383
Installing the driver locally
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer
using the cable.
• Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).
• Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,
www.samsung.com > find your product > Support or downloads.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop
Screen" on page 385).
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
1
From the Start Screen
1
Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered
on.
2
3
Make sure that the machine is powered on.
Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable.
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
384
Installing the driver locally
2
From the Desktop Screen
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the
installed driver from the Start screen.
1
3
Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen. Then,
click Next.
4
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install
Window.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
2
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
385
Installing the driver over the network
• Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on
model or country (see "Features by model" on page 7).
• You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s
control panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see
"Printing a network configuration report" on page 229).
• Machine that do not support networking will not be able to use this
feature (see "Rear view" on page 25).
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop
Screen" on page 385).
• Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,
www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads.
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
3
From the Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
2
3
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
386
Installing the driver over the network
4
From the Desktop Screen
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the
installed driver from the Start screen.
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP
address" on page 181).
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
Then, click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
387
Installing the driver over the wireless network
• Samsung Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen
when V4 driver is installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded
from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet.
If not, you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website,
www.samsung.com >find your product > Support or downloads.
• If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not
installed. If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can
download from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com >find your
product > Support or downloads.
• You must set up for wireless network using the supplied software CD in
Desktop screen mode.
• If you are using a computer without a CD-ROM, you can set up the
wireless network from the machine’s control panel (see "Wireless
network setup" on page 195).
5
You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s host name (see "Printing a
network configuration report" on page 229).
5
The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
• If you want to install Samsung’s printer management tools, you need to
install them using the supplied software CD (see "From the Desktop
Screen" on page 385).
• You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows
Store. You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
1 From Charms, select Search.
2 Click Store.
3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience.
4 Click Install.
From the Start Screen
1
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application.
2
3
From Charms, select Settings > Change PC settings > Devices.
Click Add a device.
Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4
Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
388
Installing the driver over the wireless network
6
From the Desktop Screen
For wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the wireless network setup
chapter (see "Wireless network setup" on page 195)
If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, you cannot use the
installed driver from the Start screen.
1
2
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
> Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears,
click the window and select Run Setup.exe.
3
Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation
window. Then, click Next.
4
Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen.
Then, click Next.
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
389
Uninstalling the driver
7
8
From the Start Screen
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start
screen.
3
Follow the instructions in the window.
• If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile, unintstall from the
desktop screen mode (see "From the Desktop Screen" on page 390).
From the Desktop Screen
1
2
3
4
5
From Charms, select Search > Apps.
Search and click Control Panel.
Click Programs and Features.
Right-click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
Follow the instructions in the window.
• If you want to uninstall Samsung’s printer management tools, from the
Start screen, right-click the app > Uninstall > right-click the program
you want to delete > Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
390
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines
Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location. You
can set device settings, order supplies, open troubleshooting guides, visit
Samsung’s web site, and check connected machine information. This
application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the
machine is connected to a computer with an Internet connection.
The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using.
1
9
2
6
Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience
3
To open the application,
4
From the Start screen, select the Samsung Printer Experience (
) tile.
5
The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as
described in the following table:
1
Printer
Information
This area gives you general information about your
machine. You can check information, such as the
machine’s status, location, IP address, and remaining
toner level.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
391
Using Samsung Printer Experience
10
2
User Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide
when an error occurs. You can directly open the
troubleshooting section in the user’s guide.
Adding/Deleting Printers
If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience, or if
you want to add/delete a printer, follow the instructions below.
You can only add/delete network connected printers.
3
4
Order
Supplies
Visit Samsung
Printer Settings
5
6
Device List &
Latest Scanned
Image
Click on this button to order replacement toner
cartridges online. You need to be connected to the
Internet to use this feature.
Links to Samsung printer website. You need to be
connected to the Internet to use this feature.
You can configure various machine settings such as
machine setup, paper, layout, emulation, networking,
and print information through SyncThru™ Web Service.
Your machine needs to be connected to a network. This
button will be disabled if your machine is connected via
USB cable.
The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung
Printer Experience. Under the device, you can see the
latest scanned images. Your machine needs to be
connected to a network to scan from here.
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
Adding a printer
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
Select Add Printer
Select the printer you want to add.
You can see the added printer.
If you see
mark, you can also click
mark to add printers.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
392
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Deleting a printer
11
Printing from Windows 8
1
From the Charms, select Settings.
Or, right-click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select
Settings.
2
3
4
Select Remove Printer
Select the printer you want to delete.
Click Yes.
You can see that the deleted printer is removed from the screen.
This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen.
Basic printing
1
2
3
4
Open the document to print.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
393
Using Samsung Printer Experience
5
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Cancelling a print job
If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows:
•
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
(
•
) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing
(Cancel or Stop/Clear)
button on the control panel.
Opening more settings
The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or
options.
You can set up more printing parameters.
1
2
3
4
Open the document you want to print.
From the Charms, select Devices.
Select your printer from the list
Click More settings.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
394
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Basic
Paper settings
This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies,
orientation, and document type.
This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications.
Eco settings
This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents.
Layout settings
This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
395
Using Samsung Printer Experience
Security tab
Some features may not be available depending on the model or options. If
this tab is not shown or disabled, it means that these features are not
supported.
Using the sharing feature
Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications
installed on the computer using the sharing feature.
This feature is only available for printing jpeg, bmp, tiff, gif, and png file
formats.
1
2
3
4
Select the content you want to print from other application.
From the Charms, select Share > Samsung Printer Experience .
Select the printer settings, such as the number of copies and orientation.
Click the Print button to start the print job.
Job Accounting
This option allows you to print with the given permission.
Confidential Printing
This option is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a
password to print using it.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
396
Using Samsung Printer Experience
12
Scanning from Windows 8
6
Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as
rotate and mirror.
7
Click Scan (
)and save the image.
This section is for the users with multi-functional printers.
• When you place the originals in the ADF(or DADF), Prescan (
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that
can be stored on your computer.
) is
not available.
• You can skip step 5, if the Prescan option is selected.
Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience
The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning.
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on
page 61).
2
3
4
Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen.
5
Click Prescan (
Click Scan (
).
Set up the scanning parameters such as image type, document size, and
resolution.
)to check the image.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
397
Accessing management tools
Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers. For
more information on each tool, refer to "Useful Management Tools" on page
334.
1
2
3
4
From the Charms, select Search > Apps.
Find Samsung Printers.
Under Samsung Printers, you can see installed management tools.
Click the management tool you want to use.
After installing the driver, for some management tools, you can access them
directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
398
Installing accessories
When you install optional devices, such as optional tray, memory, etc, this
machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices. If you cannot use
the optional devices you installed in this driver, you can set the optional devices
in Device Settings to use.
1
2
3
From the Charms, select Search > Settings.
Search for Devices and Printers.
Right-click on your printer icon and select Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has a ▶mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with the selected printer.
4
Select Device Settings.
The Printer properties window may differ depending on the driver or
operating system you are using.
5
6
Select the appropriate option.
Click OK until you exit the Printer properties window.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
399
Troubleshooting
Problem
Suggested Solutions
Samsung Printer
Experience is not shown
when you click more
settings.
Samsung Printer Experience is not installed.
Download the app. from the Windows Store and
install it.
Machine information is
not displayed when you
click the device in the
Devices and Printers.
Check the Printer properties. Click the Ports tab.
(Control Panel > Devices and Printers > Right-click
on your printer icon and select Printer properties)
If the port is set to File or LPT, uncheck them and
select TCP/IP, USB, or WSD.
Quick Guide for Windows 8 User
400
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact
the Samsung customer care center.
Country/Region
BANGLADESH
Country/Region
ALGERIA
ARGENTINE
ARMENIA
AUSTRALIA
Customer Care Center
021 36 11 00
0800-555-SAMSUNG
(0800-555-7267)
0-800-05-555
1300 362 603
0800-SAMSUNG (0800-7267864)
AUSTRIA
[Only for Premium HA] 0800366661
www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
0-88-555-55-55
8000-GSAM (8000-4726)
BAHRAIN
BELARUS
02-201-24-18
www.samsung.com/
be/support (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/
be_fr/support (French)
www.samsung.com/
ar/support
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
au/support
BOSNIA
www.samsung.com/
at/support
BOTSWANA
BRAZIL
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
810-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
in/support
BELGIUM
BOLIVIA
www.samsung.com/
support
BULGARIA
BURUNDI
CAMEROON
WebSite
09612300300
WebSite
[Only for Dealers] 0810-112233
AZERBAIJAN
Customer Care Center
800-10-7260
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
[HHP] 4828210
055 233 999
www.samsung.com/
support
8007260000
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-124-421 (Demais cidades e
regiões)
www.samsung.com/
br/support
4004-0000 (Capitais e grandes
centros)
800 111 31 , Безплатна
телефонна линия
www.samsung.com/
bg/support
200
www.samsung.com/
support
7095- 0077
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
357
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
CANADA
CHILE
CHINA
COLOMBIA
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
[HHP] 02-24828200
www.samsung.com/
ca_fr/support (French)
CZECH
www.samsung.com/
cl/support
DENMARK
Bogotá 600 12 72
www.samsung.com/
co/support
00-800-1-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
COSTA RICA
Cote D’ Ivoire
CYPRUS
www.samsung.com/
cn/support
Gratis desde cualquier parte del
país 01 8000 112 112 ó desde su
celular #SAM(726)
Country/Region
www.samsung.com/
ca/support(English)
400-810-5858
0-800-507-7267
CROATIA
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
072 726 786
www.samsung.com/
hr/support
8000 0077
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
Customer Care Center
8009 4000 only from landline, toll
free
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
www.samsung.com/
cz/support
70 70 19 70
www.samsung.com/
dk/support
1-800-751-2676
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
DOMINICAN
REPUBLIC
DRC
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
499999
www.samsung.com/
support
1-800-10-7267
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786)
ECUADOR
EGYPT
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/
support(English)
08000-7267864
16580
www.samsung.com/
eg/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
358
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
EIRE
Customer Care Center
0818 717100
800-6225
800-0726-7864
EL SALVADOR
ESTONIA
FINLAND
FRANCE
www.samsung.com/
ie/support
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
800-7267
www.samsung.com/
ee/support
030-6227 515
www.samsung.com/fi/
support
01 48 63 00 00
www.samsung.com/
fr/support
0180 6 7267864*
www.samsung.com/
de/support
GHANA
GREECE
Customer Care Center
0800-10077
0302-200077
80111-SAMSUNG (80111 726
7864) only from land line
www.samsung.com/
gr/support
(+30) 210 6897691 from mobile
and land line
1-800-299-0013
1-800-299-0033
GUATEMALA
0-800-555-555
800-2791-9111
HONDURAS
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
(852) 3698 4698
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
800-2791-9267
HONG KONG
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
[HHP] 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw.
0180 6 67267864* (*0,20 €/Anruf
aus dem dt. Festnetz, aus dem
Mobilfunk max. 0,60 €/Anruf)
GEORGIA
Country/Region
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw.
GERMANY
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
hk/support (Chinese)
www.samsung.com/
hk_en/support
(English)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
359
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
HUNGARY
INDIA
INDONESIA
Customer Care Center
0680SAMSUNG (0680-726-786)
0680PREMIUM (0680-773-648)
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free
1800 266 8282 - Toll Free
021-56997777
08001128888
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
hu/support
www.samsung.com/
in/support
Country/Region
KENYA
www.samsung.com/
id/support
021-8255 [CE]
021-42132 [HHP]
800-SAMSUNG (800.7267864)
ITALIA
[HHP] 800.Msamsung
(800.67267864)
1-800-234-7267
JAMAICA
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
iran/support
LATVIA
www.samsung.com/
it/support
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBURG
MACAU
JAPAN
0120-363-905
0800-22273
www.samsung.com/
jp/support
JORDAN
06 5777444
www.samsung.com/
levant/support
(English)
KAZAKHSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799,
VIP care 7700)
www.samsung.com/
support
MACEDONIA
www.samsung.com/
support
183-CALL (183-2255)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
00-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
kz_ru/support
8000-7267
www.samsung.com/
lv/support
8-800-77777
www.samsung.com/
lt/support
261 03 710
www.samsung.com/
support
0800 333
www.samsung.com/
support
023 207 777
1800-88-9999
MALAYSIA
MAURITIUS
WebSite
0800 545 545
KUWAIT
KYRGYZSTAN
IRAN
Customer Care Center
603-77137477 (Overseas
contact)
23052574020
www.samsung.com/
my/support
www.samsung.com/
support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
360
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
MEXICO
MOLDOVA
MONGOLIA
MONTENEGRO
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
MYANMAR
Customer Care Center
WebSite
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
mx/support
0-800-614-40
www.samsung.com/
support
+7-495-363-17-00
www.samsung.com/
support
020 405 888
Country/Region
001-800-5077267
NORWAY
www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
847267864 / 827267864
www.samsung.com/
support
+95-01-2399-888
www.samsung.com/
support
08 197 267 864
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
815 56480
www.samsung.com/
no/support
800-SAMSUNG (800 - 726 7864)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
OMAN
PAKISTAN
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
0800-Samsung (72678)
www.samsung.com/
pk/support
800-7267
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
800-0101
NAMIBIA
NIGERIA
NETHERLANDS
NEW ZEALAND
0800-726-7864
www.samsung.com/
africa_en/support
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864)
(€ 0,10/Min)
www.samsung.com/
nl/support
0800 726 786
www.samsung.com/
nz/support
PANAMA
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
latin/support(Spanish)
NICARAGUA
www.samsung.com/
support
080 100 2255
Customer Care Center
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
361
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
009-800-542-0001
PARAGUAY
PERU
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
0800-777-08
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]
PHILIPPINES
WebSite
1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline
and Mobile]
www.samsung.com/
pe/support
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
PUERTO RICO
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
800-CALL (800-2255)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
QATAR
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
www.samsung.com/
ph/support
REUNION
262508869
www.samsung.com/
support
9999
www.samsung.com/
support
08008 726 78 64 (08008
SAMSUNG )
www.samsung.com/
ro/support
02-4222111 [Other landline]
801-172-678* lub +48 22 607-93- www.samsung.com/
pl/support
33 *
POLAND
[HHP] 801-672-678* lub +48 22
607-93-33*
RWANDA
ROMANIA
Apel GRATUIT
* (koszt połączenia według taryfy
operatora)
PORTUGAL
808 20 7267
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
pt/support
RUSSIA
SAUDI ARABIA
8-800-555-55-55 (VIP care 8-800555-55-88)
www.samsung.com/
ru/support
8002474357
www.samsung.com/
sa/support
www.samsung.com/
sa_en/support
(English)/
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
362
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
SENEGAL
SERBIA
SINGAPORE
SLOVENIA
SLOVAKIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SPAIN
SRI LANKA
SUDAN
SWEDEN
Customer Care Center
WebSite
800-00-0077
www.samsung.com/
africa_fr/support
011 321 6899
www.samsung.com/
rs/support
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
sg/support
080 697 267 (brezplačna številka) www.samsung.com/
rs/si
090 726 786 (0,39 EUR/min)
0800 - SAMSUNG(0800-726 786)
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
0034902172678
[HHP] 0034902167267
94117540540
1969
0771 726 7864 (0771-SAMSUNG)
Country/Region
SWITZERLAND
TADJIKISTAN
TAIWAN
www.samsung.com/
support
TANZANIA
THAILAND
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
support
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/support (French)
18252273
www.samsung.com/
levant/support
(English)
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
support
0800-329999
www.samsung.com/
tw/support
0800 755 755
www.samsung.com/
support
0685 889 900
0-2689-3232,
www.samsung.com/
th/support
1800-29-3232
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
www.samsung.com/
latin/support
(Spanish)
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/support
(English)
www.samsung.com/
se/support
TURKEY
WebSite
0800 726 78 64 (0800-SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/
ch/support (German)
SYRIA
www.samsung.com/
sk/support
www.samsung.com/
es/support
Customer Care Center
444 77 11
www.samsung.com/
tr/support
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
363
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
Country/Region
TUNISIA
Customer Care Center
80-1000-12 www.samsung.com/
n_africa/support
800-SAMSUNG (800 -726 7864)
www.samsung.com/
ae/support (English)
U.A.E
UK
U.S.A
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
ae_ar/support (Arabic)
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
-Consummer
www.samsung.com/
uk/support
www.samsung.com/
us/support
Country/Region
Customer Care Center
000- 405-437-33
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
www.samsung.com/
latin_en/
support(English)
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:
7799)
www.samsung.com/
support
0-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com/
ve/support
1800 588 889
www.samsung.com/
vn/support
0211 350370
www.samsung.com/
support
Electonics
U.S.A
(Mobile Phones)
UGANDA
UKRAINE
1-800-SAMSUNG (72-6786)
[HHP] 1-888-987-HELP(4357)
www.samsung.com/
us/support
0800 300 300
www.samsung.com/
support
0-800-502-000
www.samsung.com/
ua/support (Ukrainian)
www.samsung.com/
latin/support(Spanish)
URUGUAY
UZBEKISTAN
ZAMBIA
WebSite
www.samsung.com/
ua_ru/support
(Russian)
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
364
Glossary
ADF
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as
mentioned in this user’s guide.
802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE
802).
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the
paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly
called as monochrome or black and white.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format
on that platform.
Glossary
409
Glossary
BOOTP
Coverage
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as
the coverage.
CSV
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage
when you move the machine.
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among
non-Microsoft platforms.
Collation
DADF
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine
can scan on both sides of the paper.
Control Panel
Default
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,
reset, or initialized.
Glossary
410
Glossary
DHCP
DPI
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of
IP addresses to client hosts.
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail
in the image, and a larger file size.
DIMM
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers.
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.
DRPD
Duplex
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on
a home network to share information with each other across the network.
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.
DNS
Duty Cycle
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
Glossary
411
Glossary
ECM
EtherTalk
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It
was included in the original Mac (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor
of TCP/IP networking.
Emulation
FDI
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its
internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an
intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
Glossary
412
Glossary
Gateway
IEEE
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that
allows access to another computer or network.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology
related to electricity.
Grayscale
IEEE 1284
A shades of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of
gray.
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,
a printer).
Halftone
Intranet
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a
smaller number of dots.
Mass storage device
Mass storage device, commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a nonvolatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating
platters with magnetic surfaces.
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet
Protocol standard.
Glossary
413
Glossary
IPM
ITU-T
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within
one minute.
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization
established to standardize and regulate international radio and
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and
secure printing solution than older ones.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
IPX/SPX
JBIG
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.
ISO
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.
Glossary
414
Glossary
LDAP
MH
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most
faxes.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status
of a machine.
MMR
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITUT T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
MFP
MR
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a
scanner and etc.
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and
transmitted.
Glossary
415
Glossary
NetWare
OSI
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not
itself copied or derived from something else.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device
independent and resolution independent format.
Glossary
416
Glossary
PostScript
Protocol
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an
interpreter to generate an image.
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
Printer Driver
See PostScript.
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the
printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is
usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one
minute.
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network
access.
PRN file
Resolution
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,
the greater the resolution.
Glossary
417
Glossary
SMB
TCP/IP
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication
mechanism.
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the
Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email
message to the server.
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32
characters.
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing
applications.
Toner Cartridge
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host
address.
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by a combination
of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
Glossary
418
Glossary
TWAIN
Watermark
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac
operating systems.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to
discourage counterfeiting.
UNC Path
WEP
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the
resource is located.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one
end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.
USB
WPA
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB
port to multiple peripherals.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of
WEP.
Glossary
419
Glossary
WPA-PSK
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more
advanced security.
WPS
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the
wireless network connection easily without a computer.
XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based deviceindependent document format.
Glossary
420
Index
A
scan to
accessing
management tools
398
installing
103
ordering
92
general setup
279, 293, 292
registering
291
using
291
address book setup
291
administrator’s setup
283
AirPrint
245
AnyWeb Print
338
authorized users
registering
B
Unix
Darkness
26
eco
28
id copy
26, 27
numeric keypad
27, 29
190
110
outside
109
E
pickup roller
112
easy document creator
344
scan unit
113
e-book conversion
344
109
Eco
clear button
29
eco printing
control panel
26
email address
42
searching
touch screen
convention
16
copy
general setup
69
288
289, 288
entering character
290
error message
137
F
copying
basic copying
72
favorites settings, for printing
reducing or enlarging copies
74
fax
automatic redialing
default settings
tray setting
284
253
D
buttons
279
inside
cleaning a machine
295
279
driver installation
cleaning
address book
292
document box
general setup
C
accessories
editing
26, 28
59
68
322
canceling a reserved fax job
324, 327
delaying a fax transmission
323
device options
103
forwarding a received fax to another
destination
325, 324
direct printing utility
306
general setup
259
Index 421
Index
H
printing faxes on both sides of the paper
330
receiving a fax in the computer 326, 330,
328,
329, 328, 322
sending a fax in the computer
fax feature
323, 326
322
78
receiving in Fax mode
80
250
print media feature
147
front view
23
G
general icons
special media
id copy
accessories
75
16
53, 50
55
loading originals
61
M
399
Mac
J
common Mac problems
jam
driver installation for network connected
188,
175, 176
clearing original document
tips for avoiding paper jams
5
machine features
loading
I
81, 80
preparing to fax
features
30
321
paper in multi-purpose tray
79
faxing
adjusting darkness
help button
installation
fax sending
multi sending
linux scanning
118, 123
117
L
LCD display
browsing the machine status 253, 258, 259,
263, 266, 276
379
general settings
269
glossary
409
driver installation for network connected
189,
177, 178
google cloud printing
247
printer properties
310, 309
scanning
321, 155
using SetIP
307
320, 154
scanning
using SetIP
182
mac scanning
320
machine information
266,
253, 258, 259, 263,
276
machine setup
Linux
common Linux problems
printing
378
183
machine status
276
253, 258, 259, 263, 266,
maintenance parts
93
memory
memory upgrading
memory/hard drive feature
105
331, 332
Index 422
Index
menu overview
36
multi-purpose tray
output support
60
print menu
overlay printing
loading
53
create
303
using special media
55
delete
303
print
303
N
189
188
190
184
general setup
280
installing environment
IPv6 configuration
SetIP program
wired network setup
156, 180
192
181, 182, 183, 229
181, 195
n-up printing
Mac
308
O
optional tray
92
loading paper
50
ordering
92
printer preferences
Linux
310
printer status
348
printing
Parallel
driver installation
Linux
Mac
UNIX
Windows
252
general information
P
network
57
transparency
ordering
92
placing a machine
adjusting the altitude
preparing originals type
296
Linux
309
Mac
307
287
multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Mac
308
380
printing a document
Windows
Mac
postScript driver
troubleshooting
changing the default print settings
61
print
general setup
252
mobile OS
237
298
setting as a default machine
UNIX
print media
65
308
using direct printing utility
297, 299
311, 84
306
card stock
58
envelope
56
labels
58
Linux
309
147
Mac
307
59
UNIX
311
output support
photo paper
setting the paper size
59, 55
printing a document
printing feature
296
Index 423
Index
problem
operating system problems
scan
377
problems
ordering
90
Scan Assitant
319
replacing toner cartridge
98
313
372
scan feature
faxing problems
375
Scanning
scanning problems
373
R
rear view
regulatiory information
25
157
reports
machine information 253, 259, 261, 262,
266,
270, 276, 277
reset button
30
resolution
faxing
S
safety
17
symbols
17
Samsung Printer Status
scanning
350, 391
348
SyncThru Web Service
general information
340
SyncThru™ Web Service
340
T
basic information
313
Linux scanning
321
toner cartridge
Mac
320
estimated life
95
Scanning from image editing program 318,
314,
315, 317, 318
handling instructions
94
non-Samsung and refilled
94
USB flash memory
83
redistributing toner
71
storing
secu printing
service contact numbers
401
96, 98
94
tray
181, 229
adjusting the width and length
49
Special features
286
changing the tray size
49
specifications
144
loading paper in multi-purpose tray
53
print media
147
ordering an optional tray
92
setting the paper size and type
59
status
information
samsung printer experience
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant 319
SetIP program
80
107
264
general setup
copying problems
paper feeding problems 358, 359, 360, 364
monitoring the supplies life
Storing
28, 30
288
supplies
troubleshooting
400
U
available supplies
90
estimated toner cartridge life
95
understanding the status LED
135
Index 424
Index
184,
UNIX
driver installation for network connected
190
printing
311
Unix
system requirements
USB
155
285
USB cable
driver installation 32, 34, 175, 177, 176, 178
USB flash memory
system requirements
using SetIP
32, 34, 386, 384, 388
153
181, 229
Windows 8
driver uninstallation
390
network
driver installation
386
USB cable
driver installation
384
wireless
driver installation
388
data backup
85
managing
86
printing
84
ad hoc mode
195
scanning
83
Infrastructure mode
195
using help
68, 309
W
watermark
wireless
USB cable
WPS
disconnecting
PBC mode
PBC
create
302
delete
302
wireless LED
edit
302
wireless network
network cable
Windows
common Windows problems
202, 205, 210
199
199
200
30
229
377
driver installation for network connected
Index 425
Download PDF

advertising